JP7375314B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

A pachinko machine is a type of gaming machine. In a pachinko machine, for example, a game ball is fired into a game area by a firing device, and when the game ball enters a predetermined ball entry means provided in the game area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a winning state will occur. When the identification information is variably displayed on a predetermined display device and is stopped and displayed in a specific manner based on the result of the lottery, a winning state advantageous to the player occurs, and the player acquires gaming value. becomes possible.

Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a rotating body as a movable accessory and rotate the rotating body at a predetermined timing (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2017-109029 Publication

However, there is still room for improvement in the performance using rotating bodies.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances and the like, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably perform performances using rotating bodies.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to claim 1:
a first operating means and a second operating means that can be operated by the player;
a lottery means that performs a lottery process based on a predetermined opportunity based on the operation of the first operation means ;
A gaming machine comprising a gaming value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined gaming value when a winning result is obtained in the lottery process,
a rotating body rotatably provided;
a motor that rotates the rotating body;
a motor control means for driving and controlling the motor;
a light emitting body capable of emitting a predetermined light;
A light emission control means capable of controlling the light emitter,
On the rotating body, M decorative parts (M is an integer of 1 or more) that can transmit the light emitted from the light emitting body are arranged at regular intervals at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the rotating body. ,
The motor control means is configured to be able to execute predetermined motor control accompanied by a speed change of the rotating body based on the operation of the second operation means,
The light emission control means is configured to be able to change a period in which the light emitting body is in a lighting state or a period in which it is in a non-lighting state, and the predetermined condition is set based on the result of the lottery process executed based on the operation of the first operation means. If established, when the predetermined motor control is executed based on the operation of the second operating means , it is possible to execute a predetermined light-emitting body blinking control in which the light-emitting body switches between a lighting state and a non-lighting state, and the game is played. configured to be able to change the predetermined light emitting body blinking control according to the operation mode of the second operation means operated by the person ,
The lottery process is configured such that when a predetermined winning result is obtained, a higher percentage of the predetermined conditions are met than when a corresponding winning result is not obtained;
Or
The predetermined condition is configured to be satisfied when a predetermined winning result is obtained through the lottery process;
It is characterized by being at least one of the following.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to suitably perform performances using a rotating body.

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing the state where an inner frame and a front frame set are opened. It is a front view showing the structure of an inner frame, a game board, etc. FIG. 2 is a rear view showing the configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame, back pack unit, etc. are opened. FIG. 3 is a front view of the variable display unit. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a variable display unit. It is a front view of a performance accessory unit. It is a perspective view of a performance accessory unit. It is an exploded perspective view from the front side of a performance accessory unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the production accessories unit from the back side. It is a front view of a rotating body. It is a front view of the variable display device unit in a state where the performance accessory unit is lowered. It is a block diagram showing the main electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows main processing by a main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main controller. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart showing starting prize winning processing. It is a flowchart showing jackpot determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows reach determination processing. 3 is a flowchart showing through gate passing processing. It is a flowchart showing game state check processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship among a lottery mode flag, a support mode flag, a gaming state specific counter, and a gaming state determination value. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st display control process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process at the end of a variation. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation display setting process. It is a flowchart showing variable prize winning device control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd display control process. It is a flowchart which shows opening and closing accessory control processing. 3 is a flowchart showing reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart showing the main processing of the payout control device. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart showing command determination processing. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the sub-control device. It is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of various counters used for deciding a decorative pattern. 3 is a flowchart illustrating counter update processing. 3 is a flowchart showing command determination processing of the sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a hold display setting process. It is a diagram for explaining jackpot types. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a first jackpot type determination table. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a second jackpot type determination table. (a) is a diagram showing a storage configuration of a probability variable jackpot/variation pattern table, and (b) is a diagram showing a storage configuration of a complete loss/variation pattern table. It is a diagram showing the structure of a variable pattern table at the time of a probability variable jackpot in a normal state. It is a figure showing the composition of an opening-and-closing pattern control table. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display aspect of a decorative pattern display apparatus in a normal state. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode of the decorative pattern display device when a jackpot occurs. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display aspect of a decorative pattern display device in chance mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display aspect of a decorative pattern display apparatus in gold mode. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode of a decorative pattern display device during a roulette performance. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of a decorative pattern display device when a pending display change process is performed. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram for explaining the operating principle of a drive motor. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a drive system of a drive motor. FIG. 3 is a graph diagram showing drive characteristics of a drive motor. FIG. 3 is a table diagram showing the relationship between excitation control data and excitation order pointers. FIG. 7 is a table diagram showing the relationship between the contents of an excitation time table and an acceleration counter during acceleration processing. 5 is a flowchart showing motor control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a part of accessory effect setting processing. 61 is a flowchart showing a continuation of FIG. 60, which is part of the accessory production setting process. (a) is a diagram illustrating the configuration of a role-playing pattern determination table for "end" time, and (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of a role-playing pattern determination table for "until next time". FIG. 3 is a timing chart diagram showing the relationship between the blinking period of the light emitting body and the movement period of the rotating body (decoration area). (a) to (c) are diagrams for explaining the relationship between the blinking period of the light emitting body and the movement period of the rotating body (decoration area). FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a slot machine according to another embodiment. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a reel unit according to another embodiment.

Hereinafter, one embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") will be described in detail based on the drawings. Here, FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view, and FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame 12 and front frame set 14 are opened. FIG. 4 is a front view showing the structure of the inner frame 12, game board 30, etc. FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame 12, back pack unit 203, etc. are opened. However, in FIG. 3, for convenience, nails and ornaments disposed on the game board 30 surface, the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14, etc. are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 3 and the like, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and an inner frame 12 is supported on one side of the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. .

As shown in FIG. 6 etc., the outer frame 11 includes an upper frame component 11a and a lower frame component 11b made of wooden boards, and a left frame component 11c and a right frame component 11d made of extruded aluminum alloy. The frame components 11a to 11d are assembled into a rectangular frame shape as a whole using removable fasteners such as screws.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left frame component 11c, respectively (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. The inner frame 12 and the like are housed in a space formed inside the outer frame 11.

Further, an extending wall portion 83 that protrudes toward the inner side of the outer frame 11 from near the rear end in the width direction is formed in the right side frame forming portion 11d. The extending wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 are provided on the front side of the extending wall portion 83 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked. Further, on the lower receiving portion 85, a pressing portion 86 that comes into contact with an inner frame open detection switch 92, which will be described later, is provided to protrude toward the inner side of the outer frame 11.

Further, a curtain plate decoration 87 made of resin is attached to the lower side frame forming portion 11b. A rib 88 projecting upward is integrally formed at the back of the upper surface of the curtain plate decoration 87. This makes it difficult to form a gap with the inner frame 12.

As shown in FIG. 3, the opening/closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set vertically on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with this opening/closing axis as the axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the center of the resin base 38 .

Further, a front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. Like the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened forward about an opening/closing axis set vertically on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A generally elliptical window portion 101 is formed in the center of the front frame set 14. Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) mounted on the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 1, on the front side of the front frame set 14, a lower tray 15 as a ball tray is provided at the center of the lower part, and game balls discharged from the discharge port 16 are stored in the lower tray 15. It is now possible. Further, on the front side of the lower tray 15, a ball removal lever 25 for ejecting game balls from inside the lower tray 15 is provided.

In addition, a performance button 125 is provided on the left side of the lower tray 15 as an operation means that can be operated by the player. The production button 125 is configured so that the player can press it (press it downward). Further, inside the lower plate 15, an operation detection switch (not shown) is provided as an operation detection means for detecting a pressing operation of the production button 125. When the production button 125 is pressed, an operation detection signal is output from the operation detection switch to a sub-control device 262, which will be described later. As a result, when the player presses the performance button 125, a corresponding performance is performed on the decorative symbol display device 42, etc., which will be described later, or the content of the performance is changed.

A game ball firing handle (hereinafter simply referred to as handle) 18 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 15 and protrudes toward the front side. The handle 18 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) and an operation amount detection means (not shown) for detecting the amount of operation of the operating section of the handle 18.

An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15. The upper tray 19 is a ball receiving tray that temporarily stores game balls and guides them toward a game ball launcher (hereinafter simply referred to as a launcher) 60 as a launcher to be described later while arranging them in a line. In addition, when the upper tray 19 is full of game balls, the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower tray 15 via the lower tray communication path 71 and the discharge port 16, which will be described later.

The upper tray 19 is provided with a ball lending button 121 and a return button 122. As a result, when the ball lending button 121 is operated in a game hall or the like with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending button 121 is operated in accordance with the operation. Rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 19. On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. However, the ball lending button 121 and the return button 122 are not necessary in a pachinko machine, a so-called cash machine, in which game balls are lent directly to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit.

Further, the upper plate 19 is provided with a ball extraction button 123. When the ball removal button 123 is pressed, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper tray 19 and communicating with the lower tray 15 opens, and the balls stored in the upper tray 19 are opened. The game ball is guided (falls) to the lower tray 15. That is, the player can move the game balls on the upper tray 19 to the lower tray 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123.

Furthermore, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front surface of the front frame set 14. These light emitting means play a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game by changing and controlling the light emitting mode such as lighting or blinking according to changes in the gaming state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach. For example, a frame lamp 102 containing a built-in light emitting means such as an LED is provided around the periphery of the window portion 101. Additionally, error display lamps 104 are provided on both sides of the frame lamp 102, which are turned on in the event of a predetermined error. Note that a large number of fine through holes are formed in the frame lamp 102 above each error display lamp 104 in correspondence with the speaker SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back side of the front frame set 14.

A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 137 does not have a conventional pair of front and rear rectangular glass plates that are attached separately as a front and rear pair, but has a round shape as a whole and is attached as an assembly.

Next, the inner frame 12 (resin base 38) will be explained with reference to FIG. 4. As described above, the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12 (resin base 38) at the rear side of the window hole 39. The game board 30 is attached with its peripheral edge in contact with the back side of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38). Therefore, a substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 of the resin base 38.

In addition, at the lower front of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, below the window hole 39 (game board 30), a firing device 60 and a firing rail for guiding the game ball immediately after being fired from the firing device 60 are provided. 61 is installed. In this embodiment, a solenoid type firing device is adopted as the firing device 60. Further, above the firing device 60, there is a ball feeding device that guides the game balls guided from the upper tray 19 one ball at a time to the firing position of the firing device 60 by driving a built-in driving means (for example, a solenoid). 63 are provided.

Next, the configuration of the game board 30 will be explained with reference to FIG. 4. The game board 30 includes a general winning hole 31, a variable winning device (big winning hole) 32, an upper starting winning hole 33A, a lower starting winning hole 33B, a through gate 34, a variable display device unit 35, a first special display device 43L, and The second special display device 43R and the like are arranged in the through hole formed by router machining, and are attached from the front side of the game board 30 with wood screws or the like. As is well known, when a game ball wins (enters) into various winning holes such as the general winning hole 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper starting winning hole 33A, and the lower starting winning hole 33B, it is detected by various detection switches, and the upper tray 19 A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the (or lower tray 15). For example, if there is a prize in the upper starting prize opening 33A, there will be 3 prizes, if there is a winning in the lower starting prize opening 33B, there will be one prize, and if there is a winning in the general winning opening 31, there will be 10 prizes. When there is a win in the variable winning device 32, 15 game balls are paid out to the upper tray 19 (lower tray 15). In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports such as the general winning port 31 are discharged out of the gaming area through this out port 36. .

Here, the upper starting prize opening 33A constitutes the first starting ball entering means, the lower starting winning hole 33B constitutes the second starting ball entering means, and the variable winning prize device 32 constitutes the specific ball entering means.

Further, the game board 30 has a large number of nails planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged. Thereby, it is adjusted so that winnings to the above-mentioned starting winning openings 33A, 33B, etc. occur with a moderate probability.

The variable winning device 32 includes a grand prize opening 32a into which a game ball can be won, a rectangular plate-shaped opening/closing plate 32b as an opening/closing member for opening and closing the grand prize opening 32a, and a grand prize opening for driving the opening/closing plate 32b to open and close. and a solenoid (not shown).

The variable winning device 32 is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the big winning opening 32a, but when a predetermined condition is met, such as when a jackpot or small win (to be described later) occurs, a big winning is possible. By energizing the mouth solenoid, the opening/closing plate 32b is tilted forward using its lower side as a pivot axis, and the game ball is brought into an open state where it can enter the big prize opening 32a.

The upper starting prize opening 33A allows game balls to be won at all times. On the other hand, an opening/closing accessory 37 is provided in the lower starting prize opening 33B as an opening/closing winning assistance device.

The opening/closing accessory 37 includes a pair of left and right movable blades 37a as opening/closing members that rotate in the left-right direction around the lower end side, and a starting prize opening solenoid (not shown) that drives the movable blades 37a to open and close. The movable blade 37a opens and closes in accordance with the establishment of a predetermined condition, thereby creating an open state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter the lower starting prize opening 33B, and an open state in which the gaming ball cannot enter the lower starting winning opening 33B. The structure is configured such that the state can be changed between a closed state and a closed state.

In addition, although it will be described in detail later, the upper start winning hole 33A and the lower starting winning hole 33B are provided with a first starting winning switch 224A and a second starting winning switch 224B that detect winning game balls, respectively. When a game ball is detected by the starting winning switches 224A and 224B, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot state, and special display devices 43L and 43R (and a decorative pattern display device 42 to be described later) ) is configured to display fluctuations. If you win in the lottery, you will be given a jackpot status.

Here, the jackpot type in this embodiment will be explained in detail. As shown in FIG. 42, in this embodiment, the jackpot types are "16R probability variable jackpot A", "16R probability variation jackpot B", "4R probability variation jackpot A", "4R probability variation jackpot B", "16R normal jackpot A" , "16R normal jackpot B", "4R normal jackpot A", "4R normal jackpot B", and "JUB (Jump Up Bonus) jackpot".

In the jackpot state of "16R Probable Variable Jackpot A", this is repeated 16 times (16 rounds) with "Long Open" as one special prize state.

In this embodiment, "long open" means that after the opening/closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state, a prescribed time of 30 seconds has elapsed, or that the variable winning device 32 has received a prescribed number of prizes. It refers to one opening/closing operation until it becomes a closed state on the condition that 10 game balls win a prize.

In the jackpot state of "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B", "Long Open" is set as one special prize state, and after this is repeated 4 times (4 rounds), "Short Open" is further set as one special prize state, This is repeated 12 times (12 rounds).

In this embodiment, "short opening" means that a specified time of 0.4 seconds has elapsed after the opening/closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state, or that the specified time has elapsed as specified in the variable winning device 32. It refers to one opening/closing operation until the closed state is reached on the condition that three game balls win a prize.

In this embodiment, the game ball is fired from the firing device 60 toward the game area at a rate of one every "0.6 seconds" based on the player's operation of the handle 18. On the other hand, in the above-mentioned "short opening", the specified opening time of the opening/closing plate 32b is 0.4 seconds. That is, in the case of "short opening", the opening time of the opening/closing plate 32b is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, with just one "short release", even one game ball may not win. For this reason, the opening/closing plate 32b is almost never closed based on the condition related to the number of winnings (3 winnings) among the above two closing conditions corresponding to "short opening", and the opening/closing plate 32b is once opened. will normally be closed based on the elapse of a specified time (0.4 seconds). This prevents the execution period from changing each time during the "short release" execution period.

In the jackpot states of "4R definite variable jackpot A" and "4R definite variable jackpot B", this is repeated four times (4 rounds) with "long opening" as one special prize condition.

In the jackpot state of "16R normal jackpot A", "long open" is set as one special prize state, and after this is repeated 8 times (8 rounds), "short open" is further set as one special prize state, This is repeated eight times (eight rounds).

In the jackpot state of "16R normal jackpot B", the "long open" is set as one special prize state, and after this is repeated 4 times (4 rounds), the "short open" is set as one special prize state, This is repeated 12 times (12 rounds).

In the jackpot states of "4R normal jackpot A" and "4R normal jackpot B", this is repeated four times (four rounds) with "long open" as one special prize state.

In the jackpot state of "JUB jackpot", "short opening" is set as one special prize state, and this is repeated 5 times, and then "long opening" is set as one special prize state, and this is repeated 15 times. . In other words, five "short releases" are performed in the first round, and "long releases" are performed in each of the second to 16th rounds.

In addition, when the above-mentioned various "probability variable jackpots" and "JUB jackpots" occur, a "high probability mode (high probability state)" is provided as a lottery mode after the jackpot state ends. On the other hand, when various "normal jackpots" occur, a "low probability mode (low probability state)" is given after the jackpot state ends.

"High probability mode" refers to a state in which the jackpot probability is increased compared to the "low probability mode" that is normally set. The "high probability mode" set after the end of the jackpot continues until the next jackpot occurs.

In addition, after the end of the various jackpots described above, the winning support mode related to the opening/closing accessory 37 is maintained while the special display devices 43L and 43R display fluctuations a predetermined number of times or until the next jackpot condition occurs. "High support mode (high ball entry state)" is given as a.

"High support mode" means that the ratio of the open state to the closed state per unit time of the opening/closing accessory 37 of the lower starting prize opening 33B is higher than the "low support mode (low ball entry state)" set in normal times. It refers to a state in which there is an increase in the number of

For example, the "high support mode" includes (1) a state in which the fluctuating display time on the normal symbol display device 41 (described later) is shorter than that in the "low support mode", (2) a state in which the movable blade 37a of the opening/closing accessory 37 is (3) A state in which the opening time (regulated time) is longer than in the "low support mode"; (3) a state in which the specified number of game balls that can be won per opening of the movable blade 37a is greater than in the "low support mode"; , (4) If a winning result is obtained by the opening/closing lottery of the opening/closing accessory 37 caused by the game ball passing through the through gate 34, the number of executions of the opening/closing process of the movable blade 37a per time is set to "low support mode". (5) The probability of winning in the opening/closing lottery for the opening/closing accessory 37 is higher than the probability of winning in the "low support mode." The high support mode in this embodiment employs the configurations (1), (2), and (5) above. Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of configurations (1) to (5) or any combination of configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the "high support mode." This makes it easier for game balls to win frequently in the lower starting prize opening 33B, increases the number of times the jackpot lottery is executed, and makes it possible to hold balls well.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the "high support mode" is assigned, by changing the fluctuation pattern table to a table for the "high support mode" as described later, the first and second special display devices 43L , 43R (decorative pattern display device 42) is configured so that the variable display time is shorter than that in the "low support mode".

In this embodiment, after the end of "16R probability variable jackpot A" and "4R probability variable jackpot A", a "high support mode" is provided until the next jackpot state occurs. The "high support mode" is hereinafter referred to as "until next time/high support mode."

After the completion of "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "4R Probable Variable Jackpot B", a variable display of "20 times", "30 times", "40 times" or "50 times" is performed on the special display devices 43L and 43R. ``High Support Mode'' will be granted during the period. The "high support mode" is hereinafter referred to as "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode" or "50 times/high support mode", respectively.

After the completion of "16R normal jackpot A" and "4R normal jackpot A", "high support mode" is given while "30 times" variable display is performed on special display devices 43L and 43R. The "high support mode" is hereinafter referred to as "30 times/high support mode S."

After the end of "16R normal jackpot B" and "4R normal jackpot B", "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode" or "50 times high support mode" "Support mode" will be added.

After the “JUB Jackpot” ends, “Until next time/High support mode” will be given.

In this embodiment, various gaming states occur by combining the various modes described above.

For example, if a state is given a "high probability mode" and a "high support mode", it becomes a so-called "probability variable state".

A state in which "low probability mode" and "low support mode" are added becomes a so-called "normal state."

When the "low probability mode" and "high support mode" are added, it becomes a so-called "time saving state".

When a state is provided with a "high probability mode" and a "low support mode", it becomes a so-called "potential state (potential probability variable state)". In other words, in the "potential state", the probability of winning a jackpot is simply increased, and on the surface it is no different from the "normal state", so the state with the "high probability mode" This makes it difficult for the player to recognize the situation.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned various "big wins", a "small win" is generated when a predetermined result is obtained in the win/fail lottery. In the small winning state, "short opening" is treated as one special prize state, and this is repeated five times (5 rounds). However, the lottery mode and winning support mode that are awarded after the small winning state ends are the original modes before the small winning state occurred. For example, if the lottery mode before the small winning state is "high probability mode", the "high probability mode" is maintained even after the small winning state ends.

In addition, although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the game ball is awarded in the case where the game ball enters the upper start winning hole 33A and the case where the game ball enters the lower start winning hole 33B, and when the game ball is won in a win/fail lottery. The distribution of jackpot types is different. If you win the lottery triggered by the winning of a game ball in the upper starting winning slot 33A, "16R definite variable jackpot A", "16R definite variable jackpot B", "4R definite variable jackpot A", "4R definite variable jackpot B" ”, “16R normal jackpot A”, “16R normal jackpot B” and “4R normal jackpot B”, and if you win the lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball in the lower starting winning slot 33B. The winnings will be divided into one of the following: "16R Probable Variable Jackpot A," "4R Probable Variable Jackpot A," "4R Regular Jackpot A," and "JUB Jackpot." Furthermore, the "small win" is configured to occur only when a winning lottery is triggered by a game ball landing in the lower start prize opening 33B.

The first and second special display devices 43L and 43R each include two segment display devices and are installed at the bottom of the game board 30. Each segment display device is provided with eight display segments. Each display segment has an individual light source consisting of an LED, and by controlling these individual light sources on and off, it is possible to light up only one arbitrary display segment, and also to light up any combination of display segments. The display segment can be lit. As a result, predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) are individually displayed on each segment display device.

Then, when a game ball enters the upper start winning hole 33A, a variable display is performed on the first special display device 43L, and when a game ball enters the lower start winning hole 33B, a variable display is performed on the second special display device 43R. The configuration is such that a variable display is performed at . Note that the display contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R are directly controlled by a main control device 261, which will be described later. The first special display device 43L constitutes a first display means, and the second special display device 43R constitutes a second display means.

In addition, after the variable display is performed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, depending on the display mode when the variable display stops, information such as whether or not you have won the jackpot lottery is definitively displayed. Ru. For example, when a game ball enters the upper starting prize opening 33A, a fluctuating display is made at high speed on the corresponding first special display device 43L, and when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, one of the display modes is stopped (for example, stopped for several seconds). )do. If the player wins the jackpot lottery, numerical values corresponding to various jackpots (see FIG. 42) are displayed when the fluctuations are stopped, and a jackpot state occurs.

As shown in FIG. 42, for example, if you win "16R Probable Jackpot A", "9-" will be stopped and displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, and "50 times/high support mode" will be displayed. If you win "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B" with "16R Guaranteed Variable Jacket B", "84" is stopped and displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R. In addition, if you win the "JUB jackpot", "1.-" will be stopped and displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, and if you win the "small win", the first or second special display will stop displaying. "1-" is stopped and displayed on the second special display devices 43L and 43R. Here, in order to enhance the production effect of the "JUB jackpot", the stopping modes of both "1.-" and "1-" for the "JUB jackpot" and the stopping mode "1.-" for the "JUB jackpot" are important. It is preferable that the configuration is confusing.

Of course, the manner in which the special display devices 43L and 43R stop corresponding to each type of win is not limited to the above-mentioned manner. For example, there may be not one but a plurality of stopping modes of the first or second special display device 43L, 43R indicating one winning type. For example, if you win "16R Probable Jackpot A", one of "91", "92", "93", etc. is selected and stopped on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R. It is also possible to have a configuration in which

In addition, even if there are multiple stop modes of the first or second special display device 43L, 43R indicating one winning type, there are multiple stop modes related to "JUB jackpot" and "small win". It is preferable that the plurality of stopping modes have a confusing configuration. For example, any one of "-1.", "-2", "-3.", "-4", etc. is displayed as a stop mode related to "JUB jackpot", and "small jackpot" is displayed. As a plurality of stop modes, any one of "-1", "-2.", "-3", "-4.", . . . may be stopped and displayed. In such a configuration, a pair of specific symbols (here, "1", "2", "3", etc.) with a predetermined display segment (here, ".") lit and a specific symbol that is not lit. One of them is included in a plurality of stop modes related to "JUB jackpot" and the other is included in a plurality of stop modes related to "small win", and these are alternately inserted.

Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the colors displayed in any or all display segments can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, if a new game ball enters the starting prize opening 33A, 33B during the variable display of the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, the corresponding variable display is performed at that time. It is configured to be performed after the end of the variable display. In other words, the variable display is put on standby (on hold). The maximum number of times this variable display is suspended is determined for each model of pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, the game balls that have entered the upper starting winning slot 33A and the gaming balls that have entered the lower starting winning slot 33B. Correspondingly, up to four variable displays (a total of eight variable displays) are suspended. Further, the number of times of holding is displayed by lighting on the first holding lamp 46a and the second holding lamp 46b. Incidentally, if a new game ball enters the starting prize openings 33A, 33B during the jackpot state, the corresponding variable display is also suspended.

Basically, the fluctuating display that is triggered by a winning in the upper starting winning hole 33A is stored in the order in which the corresponding game ball enters the upper starting winning hole 33A, and is digested in the order in which it is won, and is displayed in the lower starting winning hole. The variable display triggered by winning in 33B is stored in the order in which the corresponding game ball wins in the lower starting prize opening 33B, and is digested in the order in which the prize is won. However, if both the variable display triggered by a winning in the upper start winning hole 33A and the variable display triggered by a win in the lower start winning hole 33B are suspended (the first holding lamp 46a and the second If one or more of the hold lamps 46b are lit, the variable display triggered by a win in the lower starting winning hole 33B is preferentially digested. That is, the configuration is such that the variable display triggered by a winning in the upper starting winning hole 33A is not performed unless all the variable display triggered by winning in the lower starting winning hole 33B is digested. For example, in a state where one first holding lamp 46a is lit, if a game ball is won in the lower starting winning hole 33B and one second holding lamp 46b is lit, the winning in the upper starting winning hole 33A is disabled. The fluctuating display triggered by the winning will be postponed, and the fluctuating display triggered by the winning in the lower start prize opening 33B will be performed first. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the fluctuating display triggered by winning in the upper starting winning hole 33A is also referred to as the "first fluctuating display", and the fluctuating display triggered by winning in the lower starting winning opening 33B is referred to as the "second fluctuating display". ” is also called.

Further, the through gate 34 is configured to allow game balls flowing down the game area to pass through one ball at a time. As will be described in detail later, the through gate 34 is equipped with a through gate switch 225 that can detect a game ball passing through the through gate 34, and when a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, the through gate switch 225 opens or closes. An opening lottery is held to determine whether or not to open the accessory 37 (lower starting prize opening 33B), and a variable display is performed on the normal symbol display device 41. If the player wins in the open lottery, the opening/closing accessory 37 is kept open for a specified time.

The variable display device unit 35 includes a normal symbol display device 41 that displays a variable display when passing through the through gate 34, and a decorative symbol display device that displays a variable display in accordance with the variable display by the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. 42 are provided. The normal symbol display device 41 constitutes the third display means in this embodiment.

Furthermore, the variable display device unit 35 includes a variable display that indicates which of the upper start winning hole 33A and the lower start winning hole 33B the variable display performed on the decorative symbol display device 42 corresponds to. A specific lamp 40 is provided.

The normal symbol display device 41 is configured to be able to display "○" or "x" as a normal symbol by lighting up, and each time a game ball passes through the through gate 34, the normal symbol changes from "○" to "x" to The display changes at high speed in the order of "○" →... Then, when the fluctuating display stops for several seconds at the "○" symbol (winning symbol), the opening/closing accessory 37 of the lower starting prize opening 33B remains open for a predetermined period of time. The display contents of this normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by a main control device 261, which will be described later.

In addition, if a new game ball passes through the through gate 34 during the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41, the variable display for that amount will be performed after the variable display that is being performed at that point ends. It becomes. In other words, the variable display is put on standby (on hold). The maximum number of times this variable display is held is determined for each model of pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, it is held up to four times, and the number of times that the change is held is displayed by lighting on the hold lamp 44. There is.

The decorative pattern display device 42 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device, and the display contents are controlled by a sub-control device 262 and a display control device 45, which will be described later. That is, in the decorative pattern display device 42, the sub-control device 262 performs auxiliary control based on a command from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the results displayed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. Display contents are determined and displayed by a display control device 45, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 48, the decorative pattern display device 42 is provided with, for example, three pattern display areas, upper, middle, and lower, and a plurality of types of patterns (numbers) are sequentially displayed in each pattern display area (variable display After that, the symbols are stopped and displayed in order for each symbol display area (for example, in the order of upper symbol display area → lower symbol display area → middle symbol display area). For example, when the main controller 261 determines the above-mentioned various types of "probable jackpots" or various "regular jackpots", the first or second special display devices 43L, 43R display a display corresponding to the jackpot, and also display a decorative pattern. In the device 42, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to a jackpot (for example, the symbols stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area are the same), and a jackpot state starts. be done. In addition, in the case of "JUB jackpot" or "small win", the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 does not correspond to the jackpot, as will be described later.

Further, when symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to a jackpot, as a preliminary step, for example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area. In this way, the state in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area, and the variable display is still being performed in the middle symbol display area is the ready-to-win state.

Note that even if a ready-to-win state occurs, if a jackpot state does not occur, a symbol different from the symbols stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area. In addition, in the case of various types of "probable jackpots" or various "normal jackpots", the numbers of the double are stopped and displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 as described above, but in this embodiment, they are not displayed stopped. Depending on the type of symbol, it is impossible to determine the gaming state (such as "high probability mode") that will be awarded after the jackpot ends.

In addition, in the case of a "JUB jackpot" or "small win", a predetermined specific combination of numbers (hereinafter referred to as a chance symbol) is stopped and displayed instead of a double. For example, in this embodiment, "3", "4", and "1" are stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas. As a result, when the chance symbols are stopped and displayed, the player cannot distinguish between "JUB jackpot" which is more advantageous to the player and "small win" which is less advantageous to the player. ” can be expected to occur, so it is possible to suppress a decline in player interest.

Of course, the combination of specific numbers that are stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas may be different depending on whether it is a "JUB jackpot" or a "small win." In addition, in the case of a "JUB jackpot" or "small win", instead of a predetermined specific combination of numbers, the display will stop at a random winning combination, just like when you win. You can also do this.

In addition, the decorative pattern display device 42 is configured to display the number of pending changes in the special display devices 43L, 43R in correspondence with the above-mentioned pending lamps 46a, 46b (see FIG. 48, etc.).

In this embodiment, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the special display devices 43L, 43R and the hold lamps 46a, 46b are covered by the front frame set 14, making them invisible to the player. . Therefore, the player will be able to grasp the game status, lottery results, etc. solely from the display contents (symbol display, pending display, etc.) of the decorative symbol display device 42.

Of course, the configurations of the special display devices 43L, 43R and the hold lamps 46L, 46R are not limited to such configurations, and other configurations may be adopted. For example, the special display devices 43L, 43R, etc. may be configured to be visible. However, as mentioned above, the special display devices 43L and 43R are provided in an inconspicuous place such as the lower corner of the gaming area where the player cannot easily see them, and the size of the display section is small, and the characters for identification are displayed in a stopped state. The time is also relatively short. Therefore, unless one takes his eyes off the special display devices 43L and 43R and carefully observes them, it is virtually impossible to grasp the game state to be granted.

The fluctuation specific lamp 40 is equipped with an LED whose luminescent color is blue and an LED whose luminous color is red, and a variable display is performed on the decorative pattern display device 42 triggered by a winning in the upper starting prize opening 33A. In this case, the light is emitted in blue, and in the case where a variable display triggered by a winning in the lower start prize opening 33B is being performed, the light is emitted in red.

Next, the configuration of the variable display unit 35 will be explained in detail. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the center frame 47 is fixed to the front side of the game board 30, and the frame cover 213 is fixed to the back side of the game board 30, so that the variable display unit 35 is It has an integrated configuration.

A rectangular opening 213a is formed in the center of the frame cover 213, and a decorative pattern display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is detachably attached to the back side of the opening 213a.

In the variable display unit 35, a performance accessory unit 761 is arranged between the center frame 47 and the frame cover 213 (on the back side of the upper side 47a of the center frame 47). Normally, the performance accessory unit 761 is almost entirely covered by the upper side 47a of the center frame 47.

The center frame 47 has a frame shape with a substantially circular opening 751 formed in the center thereof, and the liquid crystal display section 42a of the decorative pattern display device 42 is visible through the opening 751.

Note that the center frame 47 is not composed of a single member, but includes various decorative members plated on the base member, lens members made of transparent resin that transmit light such as LEDs, etc. is assembled.

A stage portion 770 is provided on the upper surface of the lower side portion 47b of the center frame 47 along the left-right direction. The stage portion 770 has gentle undulations formed along the left-right direction.

A drop hole 774 is formed in the center of the rear wall portion 772 of the stage portion 770, which opens toward the front and into which a game ball can fall. Furthermore, a communication path 775 communicating with the drop hole 774 is provided below (inside) the central portion of the stage portion 770 . The other side of the communication path 775 is opened at the front side of the lower side portion 47b of the center frame 47, and serves as a discharge port 776 for discharging the game balls that have fallen into the drop hole 774 onto the game board 30 surface. In addition, in the state where the center frame 47 is arranged on the game board 30, as shown in FIG. 4, the discharge port 776 is located above the upper starting winning port 33A.

A guide groove 778 is formed in the center of the stage section 770 at a position in front of the drop hole 774 and slopes gently downward toward the back. This allows the game ball to fall from the stage section 770 to the drop hole 774.

A ball passage (warp passage) 764 through which game balls pass is formed inside the left side portion 47c of the center frame 47. The entrance portion 764a of the ball passage 764 opens at approximately the center in the vertical direction of the left side portion 47c of the center frame 47, while the exit portion 764b opens toward the upper surface (stage portion 770) of the lower side portion 47b of the center frame 47. It's open. This ball passage 764 allows the game ball flowing down on the surface of the game board 30 to be guided onto the stage section 770 within the center frame 47.

After the game ball guided onto the stage section 770 rolls on the stage section 770, it falls from the front onto the game board 30 surface or falls into the above-mentioned drop hole 774. Among these, the game balls that have fallen into the drop hole 774 are guided onto the game board 30 surface via the communication path 775. The game ball discharged from the discharge port 776 enters the upper start prize opening 33A with a relatively high probability.

Next, the performance accessory unit 761 will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 9 to 14. The performance accessory unit 761 includes a unit base portion 801 that is attached and fixed to the back side of the upper side 47a of the center frame 47, an accessory main body 802 that is provided on the front side of the unit base portion 801 so as to be movable up and down, and It includes a vertical drive mechanism 803 for vertically driving the accessory main body 802.

The vertical drive mechanism 803 includes a pair of left and right support arms 804A and 804B that support the accessory main body 802 from both sides, a vertical movement motor 805 serving as a driving source, and a power of the vertical movement motor 805 to the accessory main body 802 and the like. A power transmission mechanism 806 for transmitting power is provided.

The accessory main body 802, both support arms 804A and 804B, and the power transmission mechanism 806 are assembled so as to be interlocked via various cam mechanisms and various connecting members (numerals omitted). The accessory main body 802 is configured to move up and down as the power transmission mechanism 806 operates based on the drive of the up and down motor 805.

Here, the accessory main body 802 will be explained in detail. The accessory main body 802 includes a base member 809 disposed on the back side and a cover member 810 disposed on the front side.

The upper edge of the base member 809 is provided with a pair of left and right engaging protrusions 809a and 809b that engage with both support arms 804A and 804B, respectively. Further, a lower edge decorative portion 809c is provided on the substantially arc-shaped lower edge of the base member 809. However, in FIGS. 11 and 12, since the base member 809 is illustrated in a simplified manner, detailed components such as the engaging protrusions 809a and 809b and the lower edge decorative portion 809c are omitted.

A housing portion 811 is formed in the cover member 810 so as to protrude forward from a general portion 810a thereof. The housing portion 811 has a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 811a and a front wall portion 811b formed to close the front side of the peripheral wall portion 811a, and is open to the back side of the cover member 810.

The cover member 810, including the housing portion 811, is integrally formed of a transparent material such as a transparent resin material. In particular, the front wall portion 811b of the accommodating portion 811 is made up of an aggregate of fine lenses (not shown), and functions as a lens portion that can uniformly transmit light as a whole. Hereinafter, the "front wall portion 811b of the housing portion 811" will be referred to as the "circular lens portion 812."

A through hole 812a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the center of the circular lens portion 812. On the back side of the circular lens portion 812, a plurality of bosses 812b are formed to protrude rearward around the through hole 812a.

A disc-shaped LED board 813 is attached and fixed inside the housing part 811 (on the back side of the circular lens part 812).

A through hole 813a penetrating in the front-back direction is formed in the center of the LED board 813. A plurality of fitting portions 813b into which the bosses 812b of the circular lens portion 812 are fitted are formed on the inner peripheral surface of the through hole 813a. As a result, the LED board 813 is attached to the accommodating portion 811 so as not to be displaceable in the circumferential direction.

On the front side of the LED board 813, a plurality of LEDs 813c are provided as light sources, which are arranged in a ring shape at predetermined intervals. Each LED813c houses three types of LED chips (light emitting elements) in one package: an LED chip that emits red (R), an LED chip that emits green (G), and an LED chip that emits blue (B). It is a multi-color LED with a structure that can emit light in any color (visible light) by adjusting the amount of light emitted for each RGB color.

Each LED 813c is connected to a light emission control section (not shown) of the performance accessory unit 761 via a switching element such as a transistor (not shown). Then, the light emission control section of the performance accessory unit 761 controls the driving of the switching element (on/off control) based on the command etc. from the sub-control device 262, and controls each LED 813c (each of the three types of RGB LED chips). The lighting is controlled. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sub-control device 262 constitutes a light emission control means.

A bearing portion 814 is attached and fixed inside the housing portion 811 (on the back side of the circular lens portion 812). The bearing portion 814 includes a cylindrical bearing tube portion 814a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a plurality of fixing pieces 814b provided on the rear end side of the bearing tube portion 814a.

The bearing part 814 is constructed by inserting the bearing cylinder part 814a into the through hole 812a of the circular lens part 812 and the through hole 813a of the LED board 813, and by screwing the fixing piece 814b to the boss 812b. Fixed.

A rotating body 820 is attached to the front side of the cover member 810 so as to cover the housing portion 811 (circular lens portion 812). The rotating body 820 has a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 820a and a circular decorative portion 820b formed to close the front side of the peripheral wall portion 820a, and is generally formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape with an open back side. There is.

The rotating body 820 includes a rotating shaft portion 820c formed to protrude rearward from the back side of the circular decorative portion 820b, and is rotatably assembled around the rotating shaft portion 820c as an axis. Then, in a state where the rotating body 820 is assembled to the cover member 810, the rotating shaft portion 820c is inserted into the bearing cylinder portion 814a of the bearing portion 814 inserted into the through hole 812a of the circular lens portion 812, and then An end portion protrudes from the rear end portion of the bearing portion 814 .

A rotating body drive motor 817 for driving the rotating body 820 and a gear member 818 for transmitting the power to the rotating body 820 are provided on the back side of the cover member 810 .

The rotating body drive motor 817 is fixed to the cover member 810 via a case member 819 with screws or the like. A gear member 817a is attached to the rotating shaft of the rotating body drive motor 817.

Gear member 818 is formed into a disk shape. A cylindrical fixed cylinder part 818a is formed in the center of the gear member 818 and projects forward. A gear portion 818b is formed at the outer peripheral edge of the gear member 818.

A rear end portion of a rotating shaft portion 820c of a rotating body 820 protruding from a rear end portion of the bearing portion 814 is inserted into the fixed cylinder portion 818a of the gear member 818, and is fixed by a fixing means (not shown). The outer circumferential portion of the rear end of the rotating shaft portion 820c and the inner circumferential portion of the fixed cylinder portion 818a are each formed into a D-shaped cross section, and are assembled so that they match. As a result, the gear member 818 and the rotating body 820 are assembled so that they cannot be displaced relative to each other.

A gear portion 818b of the gear member 818 meshes with a gear member 817a of the rotating body drive motor 817. Thereby, when the rotating body drive motor 817 rotates, the rotating body 820 rotates.

In this embodiment (the example shown in FIGS. 11 and 12), the gear ratio (gear ratio) between the gear member 817a of the rotating body drive motor 817 and the gear portion 818b of the gear member 818 is 1:20. It is set. As a result, although the rotational speed of the rotating body 820 is reduced by the gear ratio, it is possible to rotate the rotating body 820 with low torque, which suppresses the increase in the size of the rotating body drive motor 817. As a result, it is possible to suppress the performance accessory unit 761 from increasing in size.

The rotating body drive motor 817 is a stepping motor whose rotation is controlled by a drive pulse signal applied via a motor driver 825, which will be described later, and whose rotation angle changes depending on the number of input pulses. That is, by adjusting the drive pulse signal, the amount of rotational displacement and rotational speed of the rotating body 820 can be controlled. At the same time, by monitoring the number of input drive pulse signals, it is possible to grasp the amount of rotational displacement of the rotating body 820 from the reference position.

With this configuration, in this embodiment, the rotating body drive motor 817 is configured to rotate once by an excitation signal (drive pulse signal) of, for example, 360 pulses. In other words, the angle change (angle change per step) based on one pulse of excitation signal is 1°.

Therefore, in this embodiment, since the timer interrupt is set to 2 msec, it takes 720 msec (=2 msec x 360 pulses) for the rotating body drive motor 817 to rotate once.

That is, as described above, under the configuration in which the gear ratio (gear ratio) between the gear member 817a of the rotating body drive motor 817 and the gear portion 818b of the gear member 818 is set to 1:20, the rotating body drive When the motor 817 rotates once with an excitation signal of 360 pulses, the rotating body 820 rotates once in 14400 msec (=2 msec x 360 pulses x 20).

However, the gear ratios of both are not limited to this, and may be different gear ratios. For example, the gear ratio may be 1:1. In addition, the gear member 818 is omitted, and the rotating shaft of the rotating body drive motor 817 and the rotating shaft of the rotating body 820 are connected in series so that they are aligned on the same axis, without using a gear or the like. Good too.

Therefore, from this point on, in order to make the explanation easier to understand, the gear ratio (gear ratio) between the gear member 817a of the rotating body drive motor 817 and the gear portion 818b of the gear member 818 is set to 1:1. Specifically, the rotation control process of the rotating body 820, the origin position detection process, and the like will be explained. In other words, various explanations will be given assuming that the rotating body 820 rotates once in 360 pulses (720 msec).

A position detection sensor 821 is attached to the back side of the LED board 813 to detect the rotational position of the rotating body 820 (gear member 818). This embodiment employs a photosensor in which a light emitting element and a light receiving element are spaced apart and placed facing each other.

Correspondingly, a light shielding piece 818c is formed protruding from the front surface of the gear member 818. Then, when the rotating body 820 (gear member 818) is rotationally displaced and the light shielding piece 818c is detected by the position detection sensor 821, it is recognized that the rotating body 820 is at the reference position.

Next, the configuration of the circular decorative portion 820b of the rotating body 820 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 13.

The circular decorative portion 820b includes a substantially dome-shaped central transparent portion 830 at its center, and its periphery is divided into ten decorative areas E (first decorative area E1 to tenth decorative area E10). .

Each decorative area E (E1 to E10) is divided into equal angular intervals of a predetermined angle of 36° (360°/10) around the rotation axis of the rotating body 820. That is, the width of each decorative area E in the circumferential direction (rotation direction) of the rotating body 820 is the same, and the length (equal angular interval) corresponds to the predetermined rotation angle of 36° of the rotating body 820.

Each decorative area E is formed with a first light-transmitting portion 831a, a second light-transmitting portion 831b, a third light-transmitting portion 831c, a fourth light-transmitting portion 831d, and a fifth light-transmitting portion 831e.

In addition, boundary transparent portions 832 are formed at the boundaries between two adjacent decorative areas E along the radial direction of the rotating body 820, respectively.

Therefore, in two decorative areas E that are adjacent to each other in the circumferential direction of the rotating body 820, the first transparent parts 831a are mutually adjacent, the second transparent parts 831b are each other, the third transparent parts 831c are each other, the fourth transparent parts 831d are mutually adjacent, and the fourth transparent parts 831d are mutually adjacent. 5 transparent parts 831e and two border transparent parts 832 adjacent to each other in the circumferential direction of the rotating body 820, the distance in the circumferential direction of the rotating body 820 corresponds to a predetermined rotation angle of 36 degrees of the rotating body 820. It is the length.

In other words, the rotating body 820 is configured to have the same appearance every time it rotates by 36 degrees.

In addition, the rotating body 820 has other parts (portions with a dotted pattern in FIG. 13) other than the above-mentioned light-transmitting parts such as the central light-transmitting part 830 serving as light-shielding parts that block the transmission of light. .

With this configuration, the light emitted from each LED 813c of the LED board 813 and irradiated onto the back side of the circular decorative part 820b via the circular lens part 812 is transmitted through each of the above-mentioned transparent parts such as the central transparent part 830. This makes it visible from the front side of the circular decorative portion 820b.

As described above, since the circular lens part 812 is configured to be able to uniformly transmit light as a whole, when all the LEDs 813c of the LED board 813 are turned on, the entire circular lens part 812 emits light from the surface. becomes. Therefore, in the following description, the assembly of the LED board 813 (LED 813c) and the housing section 811 (circular lens section 812) will be referred to as one functional component for convenience without being restricted by their actual configuration. It may also be referred to as "light emitter 850".

Now, a rail 50 is attached to the game board 30, which is composed of an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52, and guides the game ball fired from the firing device 60 to the upper part of the game board 30. As a result, the game ball fired as the handle 18 is rotated is guided into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 through the launch rail 61 and the rail 50.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail component 51 (upper left in FIG. 4). This prevents the game ball from returning to the rail 50 once guided from the rail 50 to the gaming area.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the outer rail component 52 is discontinued at the upper right corner of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 is discontinued at the lower right corner of the game board 30. Therefore, the gaming area is defined by the rail 50 and the inner peripheral surface of the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, since the game ball launched by the launcher 60 may flow backward through the rail 50 until it passes the return ball prevention member 53, the parallel parts of the inner and outer rail components 51 and 52 are excluded from the play area. It will be destroyed.

As shown in FIG. 3, a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the back side of the front frame set 14 below the window portion 101. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower plate communication passage 71 that connects from a dispensing mechanism section 352 to the discharge port 16 of the lower tray 15, which will be described later, and an upper plate communication passage 73 that connects from the dispensing mechanism section 352 to the upper tray 19. In addition, there is a gap at a predetermined interval between the launch rail 61 provided on the inner frame 12 and the rail unit 50 (outer rail component 52), and the ball passage unit 70 stores game balls that have fallen from the gap. A foul ball passage 72 is formed to guide the foul ball to the lower tray 15. As a result, if a game ball fired from the firing device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns as a foul ball on the rail 50, the foul ball passes through the foul ball passage 72 to the lower tray 15. be discharged.

Further, the reference numeral 67 in FIGS. 3 and 4 is a payout passage for guiding game balls put out by a payout mechanism section 352 to be described later to the front of the inner frame 12, and an upper plate communication passage 73 (upper plate 19). It is divided into a passage leading to the lower plate communication passage 71 (lower plate 15) and a passage leading to the lower plate communication passage 71 (lower plate 15). A shutter 68 is provided below the dispensing passage 67, and when the front frame set 14 is open, the shutter 68 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring or the like to substantially close the exit of the dispensing passage 67. ing. Further, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 can be pushed open by the rear end of the lower plate communication path 71 on the entrance side. In addition, the entrances (ball inflow portions) of the lower plate communication passage 71 and the upper plate communication passage 73 are adjacent to each other, and when the front frame set 14 is in the closed state, the respective inlets and the dispensing passage 67 are separated by a predetermined distance. A game ball can pass through the gap between the two. Therefore, when the upper tray 19 and the upper tray communication path 73 are full of game balls, the game balls that are paid out flow to the lower tray communication path 71 side (overflowing to the entrance side of the lower tray communication path 71), It passes through the passage 71 and is delivered to the lower tray 15.

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) that detects game balls located in the lower tray communication passage 71. Due to the presence of the full detection switch, it is possible to know that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls (that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls and the game balls are retained in the lower tray communication path 71). be able to. In this embodiment, control is performed such as prohibiting the launching device 60 from being launched based on the fact that a game ball is continuously detected for a predetermined period of time by the full detection switch. Incidentally, when the accumulation of game balls in the lower tray communication path 71 is eliminated and the game balls are no longer detected by the full detection switch (when the game balls are no longer detected for a predetermined period of time), the firing device 60 is allowed to launch.

Next, the back configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 5, 6, and the like. On the back of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally, with some of them stacked one on top of the other, and a game ball supply device (dispensing mechanism) that supplies game balls. A protective cover made of resin is attached. The dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin part is generally sometimes referred to as a back pack, so this unit will be referred to as a "back pack unit 203" here.

First, the back structure of the game board 30 will be explained with reference to FIG. 6 and the like. As described above, on the back side of the variable display device unit 35 (see FIG. 4) arranged corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30, there is a resin frame cover 213 that covers the center frame 47 from behind. It is provided so as to protrude from the rear. Further, on the back side of the frame cover 213, a decorative pattern display device 42 which is a liquid crystal display device, a display control device 45, and a sub-control device 262 facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213 can be attached and detached in a stacked state. is attached to.

The decorative pattern display device 42 is housed in a housing box (not shown) in which an opening is formed to expose the display section (liquid crystal screen) of the decorative pattern display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and the frame cover is It is fixed to the back side of 213. The display control device 45 is housed in a board box 45a and fixed to the back side of the decorative pattern display device 42 (accommodation box). The sub-control device 262 is housed in a board box 262a and fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (board box 45a). The board boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the inside thereof is visible. Note that an LED control board and the like that drive the LEDs and the like built into the center frame 47 are disposed inside the frame cover 213.

A back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 below the frame cover 213 so as to cover the general prize opening 31, the variable prize winning device 32, the starting prize openings 33A, 33B, etc. from behind. The back frame set 215 includes a ball collection mechanism (not shown) for collecting game balls that have won in various winning holes. The game balls collected by this ball collection mechanism are guided to a discharge passage section 217, which will be described later, and are discharged to the outside of the Pachinko machine 10 from a discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217.

Further, in this embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main controller 261. More specifically, the board box 263 in which the main controller 261 is mounted is rotatably supported on the back frame set 215, and can be opened rearward.

The main controller 261 is housed in a board box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The substrate boxes 263 connected by the sealing member cannot be opened unless a predetermined mark is left behind. Thereby, it is possible to easily discover that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with winning detection switches (entering ball detection means) corresponding to various winning holes such as the general winning hole 31, which detect game balls that have won into the various winning holes. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a winning hole switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning hole 31, and a count switch 223 is provided in the variable winning device 32. Further, the upper starting winning hole 33A is provided with a first starting winning switch 224A, and the lower starting winning hole 33B is provided with a second starting winning switch 224B. Furthermore, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

Although not shown, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first board relay board that is electrically connected to the prize opening switch 221, the count switch 223, and the through gate switch 225 via cable connectors. . This first board relay board relays the prize opening switch 221 etc. and the main control device 261, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 via a cable connector.

On the other hand, the starting winning switches 224A and 224B that detect winnings to the starting winning openings 33A and 33B are directly connected to the main control device 261 via a connector cable without going through a relay board.

The detection results detected by the various winning detection switches are taken into the main control device 261. Then, the main control device 261 transmits a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning status each time to the payout control device 311, and based on the output signal from the payout control device 311, a predetermined number of game balls are sent to the payout control device 311. (Except when detected by the through gate switch 225.)
Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 integrates a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism section 352. Further, the back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable on the left side (the right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward about an opening/closing axis extending along the vertical direction. ing. In addition, an external relay terminal board 240 is provided at the upper left (upper right in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203.

The external relay terminal board 240 is for relaying various information transmissions to a hall computer in a game hall, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For convenience, symbols are not attached, but for example, terminals for outputting information regarding the current gaming state (jackpot state, high probability mode, etc.), front frame set 14 detected by open detection switches 91 and 92 described later, and internal terminals. A terminal for outputting information regarding the opening of the frame 12, a terminal for outputting information regarding various error states such as a prize winning error, a lower tray full error, a tank ball error, a payout error, and a prize paid out from the payout control device 311. A terminal for outputting information regarding the number of pitches is provided.

However, in this embodiment, a terminal for outputting information regarding a "small win" is not provided, and the configuration is such that no information on the occurrence of a "small win" is output. In this embodiment, during the "high support mode", "small wins" tend to occur relatively frequently, so occurrence information is not always output every time a "small win" occurs. , this may lead to a significant increase in the output signal. Therefore, when such a problem is relatively unlikely to occur, such as during a "low support mode", the configuration may be such that information on the occurrence of a "small hit" is output.

In addition, the output of the occurrence information of the "JUB jackpot" is performed, for example, after the five "short openings" related to the "JUB jackpot" have finished, that is, after the situation is no longer distinguishable from the case of a "small win", for example, as described below. It is preferable to perform the output of the opening command (jackpot notification effect) with the occurrence of the "JUB jackpot" confirmed. In a situation where it is still not possible to distinguish between a "small win" and a "JUB jackpot" occurrence information, if only the "JUB jackpot" occurrence information is output first, the information display equipment installed in the hall's island equipment corresponding to the pachinko machine 10, etc. There is a risk that the player will know in advance that a "JUB jackpot" has occurred by looking at the "JUB jackpot" and the presentation effect of the "JUB jackpot" will be diminished.

The back pack 351 is integrally molded from, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed, and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in this embodiment, the protective cover part 354 is configured to cover the upper and right parts (the left part in FIG. 5) of the board box 263 as well. As a result, when the back pack unit 203 is in the closed state, the sealing member provided on the right side of the board box 263 and the terminal section (board side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main controller 261 are covered. That will happen.

The dispensing mechanism section 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover section 354. That is, a tank 355 that opens upward is provided above the protective cover part 354, and this tank 355 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall. Below the tank 355, a tank rail 356 having, for example, two horizontal rows of ball passages and gently sloping toward the downstream side is connected, and further downstream of the tank rail 356, a vertical case rail 357 is connected. connected. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 357, and pays out the required number of game balls as appropriate using a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. The game balls put out by the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper tray 19 and the like.

Further, the payout mechanism section 352 is provided with a payout relay board 381 that relays a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358, and a power switch board 382 that takes in main power from the outside. There is. The power switch board 382 is supplied with, for example, AC 24V main power via a voltage converter, and is turned on or off by switching the power switch 382a.

A lower frame set 251 is provided below the back pack unit 203 (board box 263), which is pivotally supported on the left side (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12 and can be opened rearward. As shown in FIG. 6, a discharge passage section 217 is formed in the lower frame set 251, into which the game balls collected by the above-mentioned ball collection mechanism flow. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is formed. That is, the game balls that have entered each winning hole such as the general winning hole 31 are collected via the ball collection mechanism of the back frame set 215, and are further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217. Note that the out port 36 similarly communicates with the discharge passage section 217, and game balls that have not won in any of the winning ports are also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the discharge chute. In this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the bottom frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the bottom frame set 251 are formed integrally. It may also be a thing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the lower frame set 251, a payout control device 311 as a payout control means, a firing control device 312, a power supply device 313, and a card unit connection board 314 are stacked one on top of the other. It is removably attached.

The launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are housed in a board box 313a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251. Although the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 will be described as independent control devices for convenience, they are actually composed of one board (printed board).

Moreover, the payout control device 311 is accommodated in the board box 311a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (launch control device 312 and power supply device 313). Note that the board box 311a in which the payout control device 311 is housed is provided with a sealing member, similar to the board box 263 in which the main control device 261 described above is housed, so that traces of the board box 311a being opened remain. It has become.

In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is housed in a board box 314a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (launch control device 312 and power supply device 313).

Note that each of the board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a is made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the inside thereof is visible.

Further, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 that projects outward from the board box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor section, the dispensing motor is rotated in forward and reverse directions to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state).

Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 that protrudes outward from the board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, which allows it to maintain the state at the time of power outage even in the event of a power outage, and to return to the state at the time of power outage when recovering from the power outage (power restoration). can. Therefore, if you turn off the power in the normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power cut off will be retained in memory, so if you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, hold down the RAM erase switch 323 and turn on the power. Insert.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 includes a cylinder lock 700 (see FIG. 1, etc.) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14. By inserting a key into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 700 and rotating it in one direction, the locking device 600 locks the cylinder. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating the other side. In this embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

As described above, the right side frame component 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with an extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (FIG. reference). This makes it difficult to enter a wire or the like from the back side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 using the wire or the like. As a result, it is possible to improve defense performance. Further, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and when the inner frame 12 is in the closed state, The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting opening of the front frame set 14 is provided at the lower right side of the front side of the inner frame 12 (on the right side of the firing device 60). As shown in FIG. 5, an inner frame open detection switch 92 for detecting opening of the inner frame 12 is provided at the lower right portion of the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in FIG. 5). The front frame open detection switch 91 and the inner frame open detection switch 92 are each equipped with a detection section that is retractable from the switch body, and the front frame open detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection section faces forward. The inner frame open detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection part faces rearward. When the detection section protrudes from the switch body, an on signal is output to the main controller 261, and when the detection section is pressed toward the switch body and recessed into the switch body, an off signal is output. It is configured to output to the main controller 261. That is, when the front frame open detection switch 91 is closed, the detection part is pressed by the back side of the front frame set 14 and turns off, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the detection part returns to the protruding state. Turns on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame open detection switch 92 is pressed by a pressing section 86 formed integrally with the receiving section 85 of the outer frame 11 to turn off, and when the inner frame 12 is opened, the detection section is turned off. The part returns to the protruding state and turns on.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main control device 261 (main board) is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 501, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 502. It also has various built-in circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, and data transmission/reception circuits. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be integrated into one chip, but may be integrated into chips for each function.

The RAM 503 includes a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 501 are stored, and a work area where the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. ) and a backup area 503a.

Furthermore, the RAM 503 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and is stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 503a. All data stored in the database is now backed up.

The backup area 503a is used when the power is cut off (including when a power outage occurs) in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power cut off when the power is turned on again when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This is an area that stores the stack pointer (similar), the values of each register, I/O, etc. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed by the main process when the power is turned off, and conversely, each value written to the backup area 503a is restored by the main process when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on after a power outage is resolved; the same applies hereinafter). It is executed in The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power outage signal SK1 output from a power outage monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Upon occurrence, power outage processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

Note that it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas, as long as the data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 503a is backed up. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which data stored in the stack area and backup area 503a is backed up, but data stored in the work area is not backed up.

An input/output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 containing the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 composed of an address bus, a data bus, and the like. The input/output port 505 is connected to a RAM erase switch circuit 543, payout control device 311, sub-control device 262, first and second special display devices 43L, 43R, normal symbol display device 41, etc., which will be described later. With this configuration, the above-described special display devices 43L, 43R and normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by the main controller 261. On the other hand, the decorative pattern display device 42 is controlled via the sub-control device 262.

In addition, although illustrations of various relay boards etc. are omitted for convenience, the input/output port 505 includes various detection switches such as the winning opening switch 221, the counting switch 223, the starting winning unit switches 224A and 224B, and the through gate switch 225, Various electrical components such as various boards are connected to it. That is, the main control device 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal sections (board side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors, and these terminal sections constitute the input/output port 505.

The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) includes a CPU 551 that is an arithmetic unit, a ROM 552 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 551, and a ROM 552 that stores various control programs and fixed value data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 552. It includes a RAM 553, which is a memory for temporarily storing data, an input/output port 554, and a bus line 555, as well as various other circuits (not shown) such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

The CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 are connected to the input/output port 554 via a bus line 555, and the display control device 45 is also connected thereto. Furthermore, the input/output port 554 is connected to a speaker SP, a performance button 125, a performance accessory unit 761, various illumination parts, and lamps 102 to 104.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on a command (for example, a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261, and causes the decorative pattern display device 42 to display the display control. As described above, in this embodiment, the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R controlled by the main controller 261 display whether or not there is a jackpot, etc. In the decorative pattern display device 42 controlled by the special display devices 43L and 43R, a display is performed in accordance with the display of the special display devices 43L and 43R. Further, the sub-control device 262 performs drive control of the performance accessory unit 761.

Further, the payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511, which is an arithmetic device, includes a ROM 512 that stores control programs executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 513 used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511 are stored, various flags and counters, It includes a work area (work area) in which I/O values and the like are stored, and a backup area 513a.

The RAM 513 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all of the data stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a data is now backed up. Note that it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas as long as the data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which data stored in the stack area and backup area 513a is backed up, but data stored in the work area is not backed up.

The backup area 513a stores the stack pointer at power-off, each register, This is an area for storing I/O values, etc. Writing to this backup area 513a is executed by the main process when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed during the main process when the power is turned on. Note that, similar to the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SK1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

In the work area, a payout permission flag is set to allow the payout control device 311 to pay out prize balls, a command reception flag is set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and a command reception flag is set to allow the payout control device 311 to pay out prize balls. A command buffer is provided in which commands sent from the computer are stored.

The payout permission flag is a flag that sets permission to pay out the prize ball, and is turned on when a specific command to permit the payout of the prize ball is transmitted from the main control device 261 and the specific command is received, and is set to the initial setting. It is turned off when processing or when returning to the state before the power was shut off. In this embodiment, the specific commands include a payout initialization command that instructs the initial processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command that instructs the payout of prize balls, and a command that instructs the main control device 261 to restore power. There are three payout return commands that are sent in this case.

The command reception flag is a flag that confirms whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command. It is turned on when any command is received, and similarly to the payout permission flag, it is used for initial setting processing or power cutoff. It is turned off when the previous return is made, and it is turned off when the received command is judged in the command judgment process.

The command buffer is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control device 261.

An input/output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 containing the ROM 512 and RAM 513 via a bus line 514 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a main control device 261, a firing control device 312, a payout device 358, and the like are connected to the input/output port 515, respectively.

The card unit connection board 314 connects the ball rental operation section (ball rental button 121 and return button 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the card unit (ball rental unit) that is placed on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. The card unit is electrically connected to each of the card units, and receives commands for ball lending operations from players and outputs them to the card unit. Note that in a cash machine in which game balls are lent directly to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, the card unit connection board 314 may be omitted.

The firing control device 312 allows or prohibits the firing device 60 from firing game balls, and the firing device 60 is permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the firing permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, the sensor signal detects that the player is touching the handle 18, and the firing stop switch that stops firing is operated. On the condition that this is not the case, the firing device 60 is driven and the game ball is fired with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the handle 18.

The display control device 45 executes variable display of decorative symbols on the decorative symbol display device 42 in accordance with instructions from the sub-control device 262. This display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530, 531. It is equipped with An input/output port 554 of the sub-control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. Further, a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, and a VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via a bus line 530. Further, an output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531, and a decorative pattern display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output port 529.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, and controls the VDP 526 by analyzing the received command or performing predetermined calculation processing based on the received command. (specifically, generation of internal commands for the VDP 526). Thereby, display control in the decorative pattern display device 42 is performed.

The program ROM 522 is a memory that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RAM 523 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. It is.

The video RAM 524 is a memory that stores display data displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42, and by rewriting the contents of this video RAM 524, the display contents of the decorative pattern display device 42 are changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory that stores character data such as symbols displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42.

The VDP 526 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates the LCD driver (liquid crystal drive circuit) built into the decorative pattern display device 42. Since the VDP 526 is implemented as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and its actual form is a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the timing of each of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the decorative pattern display device 42.

Further, the power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power cutoff due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM erase switch 323. It is equipped with

The power supply section 541 supplies necessary operating power to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311, etc. through a power path (not shown). In summary, the power supply section 541 takes in AC 24 volt power supplied from the outside and generates +12 V power for driving various switches and motors, +5 V power for logic, backup power for RAM backup, etc. These +12V power supply, +5V power supply, and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, payout control device 311, and the like. Note that operating power (+12V power, +5V power, etc.) is supplied to the firing control device 312 via the payout control device 311. Similarly, operating power is supplied to various switches, motors, etc. via the control device to which they are connected.

The power outage monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power outage signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 542 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power outage (power cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. A power outage signal SK1 is output to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. By outputting this power outage signal SK1, the main controller 261 and the dispensing control device 311 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute a power outage process (NMI interrupt process).

Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 541 normally outputs 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the power outage process. Configured to maintain the value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power outage process.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs the RAM erase signal SK2 to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 323 being pressed (including turning on the power after a power outage is resolved), the data in each of the RAMs 503 and 513 is cleared in the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. Ru.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be explained.

In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 performs a lottery using various counter information during the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16, a jackpot random number counter C1 used in a jackpot lottery (win/fail lottery) to determine whether or not a jackpot state occurs, a jackpot type determination counter C2 used to determine the jackpot type, It is used to set the initial value of the reach selection counter C3, which is used to determine whether or not to generate a reach state when the decorative symbol display device 42 is removed and fluctuated, and to determine the type of reach to be generated, and the jackpot random number counter C1. For determining the initial value random number counter CINI, the variable display time of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative pattern display device 42), and the determination of the variable pattern (performance pattern) in the decorative pattern display device 42, etc. The fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 to be used and the normal symbol random number counter C4 used for the lottery of the regular symbol display device 41 (opening lottery to determine whether or not to open the opening/closing accessory 37 of the lower starting prize opening 33B). We plan to use it.

The counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and C4 are loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value each time they are updated, and after reaching the upper limit value, the counters return to 0, which is the lower limit value. Each counter is updated regularly, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

The RAM 503 includes a special fluctuation holding area where the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type determining counter C2, and reach selection counter C3 are stored, and a normal fluctuation holding area where the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored. It is provided. The normal fluctuation holding area includes one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area).

Further, the special fluctuation reservation area includes a first special fluctuation reservation area and a second special fluctuation reservation area each having four reservation areas (first reservation area to fourth reservation area), and one execution area.

In each holding area of the first special fluctuation holding area, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type determination counter C2, and the reach selection counter C3 is set according to the winning history of the game ball to the upper starting winning opening 33A. Stored sequentially. The first special fluctuation reservation area constitutes the first reservation means.

In each holding area of the second special fluctuation holding area, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type determination counter C2, and reach selection counter C3 are set according to the winning history of game balls to the lower starting winning opening 33B. Stored sequentially. The second special fluctuation reservation area constitutes a second reservation means.

In each holding area of the normal fluctuation holding area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored in chronological order according to the passing history of the game ball to the through gate 34.

By adopting such a configuration, the variable display on the special display devices 43L, 43R and the normal symbol display device 41 can be suspended up to four times, respectively, as described above.

To explain each counter in detail, the jackpot random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 599, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value as the closing value (that is, 599), the lower limit value as the opening value is 0. It is configured to return to . Normally, when the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599), and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. On the other hand, the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated regularly (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the jackpot random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball enters the upper starting prize opening 33A or the lower starting winning opening 33B, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter buffer is changed to the first special fluctuation holding area or the second special fluctuation holding area. Stored in the holding area. Therefore, such processing constitutes a part of the first lottery and the second lottery.

There are two types of random number values that result in a jackpot: "low probability mode" and "high probability mode." In this embodiment, in the "low probability mode," the number of random number values that result in a jackpot is set as "low probability mode" and "high probability mode." 2, the value is "7, 307", and in the "high probability mode", the number of random number values that will be a jackpot is 20, and the values are "7 to 16, 307 to 316". That is, in the "low probability mode", there is a probability of 1/300 to win the lottery (a jackpot state occurs), and in the "high probability mode", the probability is 1/30 to win the lottery. These winning probabilities correspond to the first winning probabilities in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with a validity determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to a jackpot. In this embodiment, there are two validity determination tables, the first validity determination table storing "7, 307" and the second validity determination table storing "7 to 16, 307 to 316". be.

Further, in this embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is also used when determining a "small win". The number of random number values that result in a "small win" is 50, and the values are "101-125, 401-425". In other words, the probability of winning the lottery is 1/12 (a small winning state occurs). This probability of winning corresponds to the second probability of winning in this embodiment.

The jackpot type determination counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of, for example, 0 to 19, and after reaching the upper limit (that is, 19), returns to 0, which is the lower limit. In this embodiment, the jackpot type determination counter C2 determines the jackpot type, that is, "16R probability variable jackpot A", "16R probability variation jackpot B", "4R probability variation jackpot A", "4R probability variation jackpot B", "16R normal jackpot A". , "16R normal jackpot B", "4R normal jackpot A", "4R normal jackpot B", or "JUB jackpot" is determined.

The ROM 502 is provided with a jackpot type determination table that is referred to when determining which jackpot the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 corresponds to. Furthermore, as described above, in this embodiment, the distribution of the jackpot type is different depending on whether the game ball wins into the upper start winning hole 33A or the case where the game ball wins into the lower start winning hole 33B. That is, in this embodiment, there are two jackpot type determination tables, a first jackpot type determination table that is taken into consideration when a game ball enters the upper start winning hole 33A, and a first jackpot type determination table that is taken into consideration when the game ball enters the lower start winning hole 33B. There is a second jackpot type determination table that is taken into consideration when winning a prize.

Specifically, when the game ball enters the upper starting prize opening 33A, with reference to the first jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 43), if the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is "0, 1". The granting of “16R Probable Variable Jackpot A” is determined.

In addition, if the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is "2", it is decided to award "16R probability variable jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode", and if it is "3", it is decided to give "30 times/high support mode". It is decided to award "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B" with "Mode", and if it is "4", it is decided to award "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B" with "40 times/high support mode", and if it is "5", it is decided to award "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B" with "50 It has been decided that ``16R Probable Variable Jackpot B'' with ``Numbers and High Support Mode'' will be awarded.

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is "6", it is decided to award "4R probability variable jackpot A".

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is "7", it is decided to grant "4R probability variable jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode", and if it is "8", it is decided to award "30 times/high support mode". It is decided to award "4R probability variable jackpot B" with "9", if it is "9", it is decided to award "4R probability variable jackpot B" with "40 times/high support mode", and if it is "10", it is decided to award "4R probability variable jackpot B" with "50 times/high support mode". It is decided to award "4R Probable Variable Jackpot B" with "High Support Mode".

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is "11", it is determined that "16R normal jackpot A" will be awarded.

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is "12", it is decided to award "16R normal jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode", and if it is "13", it is decided to award "30 times/high support mode". If it is "14", it is decided to award "16R normal jackpot B" with "40 times/high support mode", and if it is "15", it is decided to award "16R normal jackpot B" with "50 times/high support mode". It is decided to award "16R normal jackpot B" with "high support mode".

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is "16", it is decided to award "4R normal jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode", and if it is "17", it is decided to award "30 times/high support mode". If it is "18", it is decided to award "4R normal jackpot B" with "40 times/high support mode", and if it is "19", it is decided to award "4R normal jackpot B" with "50 times/high support mode". It is decided to award "4R normal jackpot B" with "high support mode".

In other words, if you win the lottery triggered by winning in the upper starting winning slot 33A, there is a 10% probability that it will be "16R probability variable jackpot A", a 20% probability that it will be "16R probability variable jackpot B", and 5 % probability is "4R Probable Variable Jackpot A", 20% probability is "4R Probable Variable Jackpot B", 5% probability is "16R Normal Jackpot A", and 20% probability is "16R Normal Jackpot B". , there is a 20% probability of "4R normal jackpot B".

On the other hand, when the game ball enters the lower start prize opening 33B, with reference to the second jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 44), if the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is "0 to 9", " If it is "10, 11", it is decided to award "4R probability variable jackpot A", and if it is "12, 13", it is decided to award "4R regular jackpot A". If it is "14", it is decided to give "4R normal jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode", and if it is "15", it is decided to give "4R normal jackpot B" with "30 times/high support mode". If it is "16", it is decided to award "4R normal jackpot B" with "40 times / high support mode", and if it is "17", it is decided to give "4R normal jackpot B" with "50 times / high support mode". If it is "18, 19", it is decided to award "Normal jackpot B", and if it is "18, 19", it is decided to award "JUB jackpot".

In other words, if you win the lottery triggered by winning in the lower starting winning slot 33B, there is a 50% probability that it will be a "16R probability variable jackpot A", a 10% probability that it will be a "4R probability variable jackpot A", and a 10% probability. % probability will be "4R normal jackpot A", 20% probability will be "4R normal jackpot B", and 10% probability will be "JUB jackpot".

The jackpot type determination counter C2 is updated regularly (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is stored in the jackpot type determination counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball enters the upper start winning hole 33A or the lower start winning hole 33B, the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 stored in the jackpot type determination counter buffer is changed to the special fluctuation holding area (first special (Fluctuation Holding Area or Second Special Fluctuation Holding Area).

Further, the reach selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 238), returns to 0, which is the lower limit value. In this embodiment, after the reach selection counter C3 generates the reach with respect to the decorative symbol, the final stop symbol is shifted by one position before and after the reach symbol and stops. We will draw a lottery between ``reach except before and after,'' where the symbol stops at a point other than before and after the reach symbol, and ``completely miss,'' where no reach occurs. In this embodiment, the ROM 502 stores a reach determination table that is referred to when determining whether the value of the reach selection counter C3 corresponds to the occurrence of a reach state and which reach it corresponds to. It is provided. The reach determination table stores values from 0 to 238, C3 = 0, 1 corresponds to a reach that is out of the front and back, C3 = 2 to 21 corresponds to a reach other than the front and back, and C3 = 22 to 238 is a perfect reach. It has a configuration that falls under the category of outliers.

The reach selection counter C3 is updated regularly (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the reach selection counter C3 is stored in the reach selection counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball enters the upper starting prize opening 33A or the lower starting winning opening 33B, the value of the reach selection counter C3 stored in the reach selection counter buffer is changed to the special fluctuation holding area (first special fluctuation holding area) of the RAM 503. area or second special fluctuation holding area).

Further, among the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2, one variation type counter CS1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 198, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 198), the lower limit value is added. The other variation type counter CS2 is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 240, for example, and returns to 0, which is the lower limit, after reaching the upper limit (that is, 240). It becomes. In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as a "first variation type counter" and CS2 is also referred to as a "second variation type counter." This is also indicated in FIG. 16.

For example, in the probability variable jackpot time/variation pattern table (see FIG. 46) related to the normal state, the first variation type counter CS1 determines the reach types of decorative symbols such as normal reach, super reach, premium reach, and other rough fluctuation patterns. The second variation type counter CS2 determines more detailed variation aspects such as variation time. Therefore, by combining these variation type counters CS1 and CS2, it is possible to easily realize diversification of variation patterns. Of course, it is also possible to determine the variation mode using only the first variation type counter CS1.

Note that the normal reach is a reach pattern in which no special effects are displayed other than the variation of decorative symbols. Super Reach is a reach pattern in which characters and the like are displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbols while the decorative symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner (after the reach state is established), thereby creating a sense of anticipation in the player. be. Premium reach is a performance mode that can only be derived when a jackpot state occurs, and during the fluctuating display of decorative symbols (after the reach state is established), in addition to the decorative symbols, characters with a different pattern from super reach are displayed. This is a reach pattern that creates a sense of expectation in the player.

Further, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once every time a normal process (described later) is executed once, and are repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when the decorative pattern display device 42 determines a variation pattern at the start of variation of the decorative pattern.

Note that the size and range of each counter are merely examples and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the sizes of the jackpot random number counter C1, the reach selection counter C3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are all different prime numbers, and are not synchronized in any case.

In addition, the normal symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially increments by 1 within the range of 0 to 9, for example, and returns to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (that is, 9). The random number counter C4 is updated regularly (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and when the game ball passes through the through gate 34, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired.

Then, when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 that results in a winning is acquired, after a fluctuating display is performed on the normal symbol display device 41 for a predetermined period of time, the symbol corresponding to the winning ("○" in this example) is stopped and displayed. Then, the opening/closing accessory 37 of the lower starting prize opening 33B remains open for a predetermined period of time.

In this embodiment, in the "low support mode", there are two winning random numbers, "0 and 1". On the other hand, in the "high support mode", the winning random number values are eight from "0 to 7". That is, in the "low support mode", the opening/closing accessory 37 will be in the open state with a probability of 1/5, and in the "high support mode", the opening/closing accessory 37 will be in the open state with a probability of 4/5. These winning probabilities correspond to the third winning probability in this embodiment.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be explained with reference to a flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 can be roughly divided into main processing that is started upon power-on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a 2 msec cycle in this embodiment), and a stop signal sent to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process that is activated by the input of . For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be explained first, and then the main process will be explained.

The NMI interrupt process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt causes the state of the main controller 261 at the time of power-off to be stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

The above NMI interrupt processing is similarly executed by the payout control device 311, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. and starts NMI interrupt processing. Its contents are as explained above.

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, for example, every 2 msec.

In FIG. 19, first in step S301, a process of reading various winning detection switches is executed. Here, the states of various winning detection switches (win opening switch 221, count switch 223, starting winning switches 224A, 224B, through gate switch 225) connected to the main control device 261 are read, and the states of the switches are determined. and save the detection information.

In step S302, a random number initial value update process is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the upper limit value (599 in this example), it is cleared to 0.

Furthermore, in step S303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type determination counter C2, the reach selection counter C3, and the normal symbol random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when these counter values reach the upper limit value, they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1, C2, C3, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

Thereafter, in step S304, a starting winning process is executed in response to a winning to the starting winning openings 33A and 33B, and in step S305, a through gate passing process is executed as the game ball passes through the through gate 34. Thereafter, the timer interrupt processing is temporarily ended.

Here, the starting winning process in step S304 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 20. In addition, the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area and each holding area include a jackpot random number storage area that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type random number storage area that stores the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2, and a reach selection counter C3. A reach random number storage area is provided to store the value of .

First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won in the lower starting winning hole 33B based on the detection information of the second starting winning switch 224B. If an affirmative determination is made in step S501, in step S502, the value of the lower holding counter Nb that counts the number of holdings in the variable display triggered by winning in the lower starting prize opening 33B is set to an upper limit value (in this embodiment, "4"). ”). If a negative determination is made in step S502, the process moves to step S509. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S502, the process advances to step S503 and the lower holding counter Nb is incremented by one.

In the subsequent step S504, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type determination counter C2, and the reach selection counter C3 updated in the random number update process of step S303 are set among the vacant holding areas of the second special fluctuation holding area. Store in the first area. After step S504, the process moves to step S505.

In step S505, a jackpot determination process is performed to determine whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to a jackpot. The details of the jackpot determination process will be described later.

In the following step S506, when it is determined in step S505 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot, the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is used. Then, a second jackpot type determination process is performed to determine the type of jackpot.

Here, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot winning flag was set in the jackpot determination process that was performed immediately before, and if the determination is negative, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the judgment is affirmative, the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area corresponds to "16R probability variable jackpot A" with reference to the second jackpot type judgment table. If the value is one of "0 to 9", turn on the "16R Probable Variable Jackpot A Flag", and if the value is either "10, 11" corresponding to "4R Probable Variable Jackpot A" , turn on the "4R Probable Jackpot A Flag", and if the value is either "12, 13" corresponding to "4R Normal Jackpot A", turn on the "4R Normal Jackpot A Flag", If it is one of the values ``14 to 17'' corresponding to ``4R normal jackpot B'', turn on the ``4R normal jackpot B flag'', and select one of the values ``18, 19'' corresponding to ``JUB jackpot''. If so, turn on the "JUB jackpot flag".

In addition, if you win "16R definite strange jackpot A", "4R sure strange jackpot A" or "JUB jackpot" here, that is, if "until next time / high support mode" is given after the jackpot ends, after the jackpot ends. For a predetermined period of time (20 variable displays in this embodiment), for example, a production lottery is held to determine whether or not to perform a non-announcement production that does not notify that the assigned "high support mode" is "until next time/high support mode". The lottery is held with a probability of about 1/100. If it is determined as a result of the lottery that a non-notification performance will be performed, a non-notification performance execution flag is turned on.

In the following step S507, when it is determined in step S505 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to a jackpot, the value of the reach selection counter C3 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is determined. , performs reach determination processing to determine the type of reach. Note that details of the reach determination process will be described later.

In the subsequent step S508, a holding control command setting process is performed. The hold control command is a command for informing the sub-control device 262 in advance of various hold information (information used to determine the content of the change display) held and stored in the second special change hold area. be. The hold control command set in this process is output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output process (see step S201). The hold control command includes, for example, as hold information, information indicating the results of the above-mentioned jackpot determination process and jackpot type determination process, and information indicating which of the starting winning openings 33A and 33B is the trigger for the variable display. It will be done.

Here, details of the jackpot determination process in step S505 will be explained with reference to FIG. 21.

First, in step S5101, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is determined to be either "7" or "307" corresponding to the jackpot stored in the first judgment table. Determine if they match. Although the process of step S5101 is simplified in FIG. 21 for convenience, in reality, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is "7" and if the determination is negative. If it is determined, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is "307", and if either of these determinations is affirmative, an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, and which determination is made. If a negative determination is also made in step S5101, a negative determination is made in step S5101.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot state will occur, the jackpot winning flag is turned on in step S5102, and then the process moves to step S5105. The function of the main control device 261 that generates a jackpot state corresponding to the first special gaming state in step S5102 constitutes the first special gaming state generating means in this embodiment.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5101, it is determined in step S5103 whether or not the "high probability mode" is in progress based on the value of a lottery mode flag, which will be described later.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5103, that is, if the "high probability mode" is in progress, in step S5104, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is used for the second validity determination. Among the values corresponding to jackpots stored in the table, it is determined whether it is any one of "8 to 16, 308 to 316" excluding the above "7" and "307". In this determination process, it is actually determined one by one whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 matches each value corresponding to a jackpot, as described above.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5104, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot state will occur during the "high probability mode," the jackpot winning flag is turned on in step S5102, and then the process is ended.

The determination processing in step S5101 and step S5104 constitutes the first lottery in this embodiment, and the function of the main control device 261 that executes this constitutes the first lottery means.

If a negative determination is made in step S5103 or step S5104, that is, if it is not a "big hit", the process moves to step S5105.

In addition, in step S5105, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area matches the value "101 to 125, 401 to 425" corresponding to a small win. .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5105, that is, if it is determined that a small winning state will occur, the small winning winning flag is turned on in step S5106, and then the process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5105, this process is directly ended.

The determination process in step S5105 constitutes the second lottery in this embodiment, and the function of the main controller 261 that executes this constitutes the second lottery means. Further, the function of the main control device 261 that generates a small winning state corresponding to the second special gaming state in step S5106 constitutes the second special gaming state generating means in this embodiment.

Next, the reach determination process in step S507 will be described with reference to FIG. 22.

First, in step S5301, it is determined whether a winning flag (big hit winning flag or small winning winning flag) was set in the jackpot determining process performed immediately before. When an affirmative determination is made in step S5301, that is, when a jackpot state or a small win state occurs, the process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5301, that is, if a winning state does not occur, in step S5302, the value of the reach selection counter C3 is newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area, taking into account the reach determination table. It is determined whether or not the value matches one of the values "0, 1" corresponding to "front/back off reach". When an affirmative determination is made in step S5302, in step S5303, a front-back off-reach flag indicating the occurrence of a front-back off reach is turned on, and then this process is ended.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5302, then in step S5304, the reach determination table is taken into account and the value of the reach selection counter C3 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is determined to be "reach other than front and back". It is determined whether the value matches any one of the values "2 to 21" corresponding to "." If an affirmative determination is made in step S5304, the flag other than front and back deviation is turned on in step S5305, and then this process is ended.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S5304, that is, if the result is "completely off", the process is immediately terminated.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 20, after the process in step S508, or if a negative determination is made in step S501, in step S509, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the upper starting prize opening 33A or not. The determination is made based on the detection information of the switch 224A. If a negative determination is made in step S509, the process ends immediately. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made, in step S510, the value of the upper hold counter Na that counts the number of holds in the variable display triggered by winning in the upper starting winning hole 33A is set to the upper limit value (in this embodiment, "4"). ”). If a negative determination is made in step S510, the process ends immediately. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S510, the process advances to step S511, and the upper hold counter Na is incremented by one.

In the subsequent step S512, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type determination counter C2, and the reach selection counter C3 is stored in the first area among the vacant reservation areas of the first special fluctuation reservation area. After step S512, the process moves to step S513.

In step S513, a jackpot determination process is performed to determine whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 newly stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to a jackpot. Incidentally, the jackpot determination process in step S513 is the same as the jackpot determination process in step S505 above, except for the small hit determination, and the information regarding the variable display that is the subject of the process is based on the winning in the upper start winning opening 33A. Since the only difference is that , a detailed explanation will be omitted for convenience.

In the following step S514, if it is determined in step S513 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot, the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 newly stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is used. Then, a first jackpot type determination process is performed to determine the type of jackpot.

Here, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot winning flag was set in the jackpot determination process that was performed immediately before, and if the determination is negative, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 newly stored in the first special fluctuation holding area corresponds to "16R probability variable jackpot A" with reference to the above-mentioned first jackpot type judgment table. If the value is either “0, 1”, turn on the “16R Probable Variable Jackpot A Flag”, and if the value is one of “2 to 5” corresponding to “16R Probable Variable Jackpot B” turns on the "16R definite variable jackpot B flag", and if the value is "6" corresponding to "4R definite variable jackpot A", turns on the "4R definite variable jackpot A flag", corresponding to "4R definite variable jackpot B" If the value is "7 to 10", turn on the "4R Probable Variable Jackpot B flag", and if the value is "11" corresponding to "16R normal jackpot A", turn on the "16R normal jackpot". A flag" is turned on, and if the value is one of "12 to 15" corresponding to "16R normal jackpot B", turn on the "16R normal jackpot B flag" and correspond to "4R normal jackpot B". If the value is one of "16 to 19", the "4R normal jackpot B flag" is turned on.

In addition, if you win "16R Probable Variable Jackpot A" or "4R Probable Variable Jackpot A" here, that is, if "Until next time/high support mode" is granted after the jackpot ends, the above-mentioned non-announcement will be performed as in step S506. A lottery will be held to decide whether or not to perform the performance. If it is determined as a result of the lottery that a non-notification performance will be performed, a non-notification performance execution flag is turned on.

In the following step S515, if it is determined in step S513 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to a jackpot, the value of the reach selection counter C3 newly stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is determined. , performs reach determination processing to determine the type of reach. The reach determination process in step S515 is similar to the reach determination process in step S507, except that the information regarding the variable display that is the target of the process is based on the ball hitting the upper starting prize opening 33A. For convenience, detailed explanation will be omitted.

In the subsequent step S516, a holding control command setting process is performed. After that, this process ends. The setting process for the hold control command in step S516 is similar to the process for setting the hold control command in step S508, and the information regarding the variable display to be processed is based on the ball to the upper starting prize opening 33A. Since the only difference is that , a detailed explanation will be omitted for convenience.

Next, the through gate passing process in step S305 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23.

In step S601, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225.

If a negative determination is made in step S601, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, the number of pending variable displays performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is counted in step S602. It is determined whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S602, that is, if it is confirmed that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, and if the value of the normal holding counter Nc is <4, the process advances to step S603, and the normal holding counter is Increment Nc by 1.

Further, in the subsequent step S604, a random number related to validity is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 updated in the random number update process of step S303 is stored in the first area among the free storage areas of the normal fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503. Thereafter, the through gate passing process is ended. Therefore, the process in step S604 constitutes a part of the third lottery.

Next, the flow of the main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 17. This main processing is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

First, in step S101, an initial setting process is executed when the power is turned on. Specifically, in addition to setting a predetermined value in the stack pointer, for example, 1. Executes wait processing for about seconds. In the following step S102, RAM access is permitted.

Thereafter, data backup processing is executed regarding the RAM 503 within the CPU 501. That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed down (ON), and if it is pressed down, the process moves to step S112 to clear (erase) the backup data. do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, it is determined in the subsequent step S104 whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if it is not set, the backup data is not stored, so the process moves to step S112 in this case as well. If power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step S105, and in the subsequent step S106, whether or not the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off is determined. , that is, determine the validity of the backup. If the RAM judgment value calculated here does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was turned off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in this case as well, the process moves to step S112.

In the process of step S112, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc. that serve as the sub-side control device. The sub-control device 262 that has received the initialization command executes its own initialization process as described later, and sets the value "0" of the gaming state determination value Xj corresponding to the "normal state" which is the initial setting to the gaming state Store in the status storage area.

Thereafter, the process moves to RAM initialization processing (step S113, etc.). Note that the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of this RAM judgment value, it is also possible to judge the effectiveness of the backup based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly saved.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on, the process moves to RAM initialization processing (step S113, etc.). Furthermore, if the power-off occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the process similarly proceeds to the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step S113, etc.). That is, in step S113, the used area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the subsequent step S114, the initial value of the RAM 503 is set. Thereafter, in step S115, interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to normal processing, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step S103: NO), the conditions are that power-off occurrence information is set and that the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. Then, the processing at the time of power restoration (processing at the time of recovery from power outage) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before the power-off is restored, and in step S108, the information on the occurrence of the power-off is cleared.

In step S109, a gaming state check process is executed to check the gaming state stored in the RAM 503 at the time of power-off.

In the subsequent step S110, a return command is transmitted to return the sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc., which are the sub-side control devices, to the gaming state at the time of power-off. Note that the return command sent to the sub-control device 262 includes information regarding the gaming state at the time of power-off identified in the gaming state check process (gaming state determination value Xj described later).

In step S111, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Thereafter, in step S115, interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to normal processing, which will be described later.

Here, the game status check process in step S109 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a gaming state check process, and FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence among a lottery mode flag, a support mode flag, a gaming state specific counter Kj, and a gaming state determination value Xj, which will be described later. Note that the game state check process is also executed in the variable display setting process (step S807) and the winning end setting process (step S1216), which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 24, in step S1901, a process of reading various information related to the gaming state at the time of power-off, which is backed up and stored in the RAM 503, is executed. Specifically, the value of the lottery mode flag, the value of the support mode flag, and the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj are each read from the RAM 503.

The lottery mode flag is state determination information for determining whether the lottery mode is "low probability mode" or "high probability mode", and the flag value indicates whether the lottery mode is "low probability mode". In the case of "high probability mode", "50 (H)" is set, and in the case of "high probability mode", "53 (H)" is set. Incidentally, the value "5" of the upper four bits in the lottery mode flag is uniformly added as a countermeasure against noise, and is not particularly used to determine the gaming state.

The support mode flag is state determination information for determining what state the winning support mode is in. As the flag value, if the winning support mode is "low support mode", "A0 ( H)" is set. Incidentally, the value "A" of the upper four bits in the support mode flag is uniformly added as a noise countermeasure, and is not specifically used to determine the gaming state.

In addition, if the winning support mode is "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode" or "50 times/high support mode", the flag value is "A1(H)" is set.

In addition, when the winning support mode is "30 times/high support mode S", "A2 (H)" is set as the flag value, and when it is "until next time/high support mode", the flag value is set. "A3(H)" is set.

The gaming state specific counter Kj is state determination information for counting the number of executions of the fluctuating display after the end of the jackpot and specifying the switching timing of the gaming state.When the jackpot ends, a predetermined initial value is set and the fluctuating display is subtracted by 1 each time it is performed. For example, as described later, if "50" is set as the initial value of the gaming state specific counter Kj, and the value of the counter Kj becomes "31" after that, the fluctuation display at that time will be changed after the jackpot ends. It can be specified that this is the 20th fluctuation display.

In this embodiment, if you win "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B", "4R Probable Variable Jackpot B", "16R Normal Jackpot B" or "4R Normal Jackpot B", in other words, after the jackpot ends, "20 times/high support mode", When "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode", or "50 times/high support mode" is provided, "50" is set as the initial value.

In addition, if you win "16R normal jackpot A" or "4R normal jackpot A", that is, if "30 times/high support mode S" is awarded after the jackpot ends, "30" is set as the initial value. Ru.

In addition, if you win "16R Probable Variable Jackpot A", "4R Probable Variable Jackpot A", or "JUB Jackpot", that is, if "High Support Mode Until Next Time" is granted after the jackpot ends, the initial value will be "0". " is set. However, when the non-notification performance execution flag is turned on and the non-notification performance is executed, "30" is set as the initial value. The non-notification performance execution flag is turned off after the initial value is set.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 24, in step S1902, the value of the lottery mode flag read in step S1901 and the value of the support mode flag are added.

In the following step S1903, the addition value calculated in step S1902 is ANDed with a predetermined mask value (in this embodiment, "07(H)"), the lower 3 bits of data are extracted, and the data is processed for a predetermined operation. Set the game state determination value Xj in the area.

In step S1904, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "1". In other words, the lottery mode is "low probability mode" and the winning support mode is "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode", or "50 times/high support mode". mode.

If a negative determination is made here, the process moves to step S1905, and it is determined whether or not the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "4". In other words, the lottery mode is "high probability mode" and the winning support mode is "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode", or "50 times/high support mode". mode.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1904 or step S1905, the process moves to step S1909. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1905, the process moves to step S1906.

In step S1906, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "2". That is, it is determined whether the lottery mode is "low probability mode" and the winning support mode is "30 times/high support mode S".

If a negative determination is made here, the process moves to step S1907, and it is determined whether or not the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "5". That is, it is determined whether the lottery mode is "high probability mode" and the winning support mode is "30 times/high support mode S".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1906 or step S1907, the process moves to step S1912. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1907, the process moves to step S1908.

In step S1908, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "6". That is, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the "high probability mode" and the winning support mode is the "until next time/high support mode".

If an affirmative determination is made here, the process moves to step S1914. On the other hand, if the determination is negative, the process moves to step S1916, where the value "6" of the gaming state determination value Xj is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 503, and the present process ends.

Now, an affirmative determination is made in step S1904 or step S1905, and in step S1909, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj is "31". That is, it is determined whether or not the fluctuating display after the end of the jackpot is the 20th time. If the determination is affirmative here, the process moves to step S1913, and if the determination is negative, the process moves to step S1910.

In step S1910, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj is "21". That is, it is determined whether or not the fluctuating display after the end of the jackpot is the 30th time. If the determination is affirmative here, the process moves to step S1913, and if the determination is negative, the process moves to step S1911.

In step S1911, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj is "11". That is, it is determined whether or not the fluctuating display after the end of the jackpot is the 40th time. If the determination is affirmative here, the process moves to step S1913, and if the determination is negative, the process moves to step S1912.

In step S1912, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj is "1". That is, it is determined whether it is the "50th time (in the case of the initial value "50")" or the "30th time (in the case of the initial value "30")".

If a negative determination is made here, the process moves to step S1916, where the value of the gaming state determination value Finish the process.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1912, that is, if the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj is "1", the process moves to step S1913, and the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is changed to "7". . Thereafter, the process moves to step S1916, where the value "7" of the gaming state determination value Xj is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 503, and the present process ends.

Now, an affirmative determination is made in step S1908, and in step S1914, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj is "0". That is, it is determined whether the winning support mode is the "until next time/high support mode" in which the non-notification effect is not performed. If an affirmative determination is made here, the value "6" of the gaming state determination value Xj is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 503, and the present process is ended.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1914, that is, if it is the "until next time/high support mode" in which a non-notification effect is performed, the process moves to step S1915, and the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is set to "5". Change to Thereafter, the process moves to step S1916, where the value "5" of the gaming state determination value Xj is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 503, and the present process ends. As a result, even if you are in the "until next time/high support mode" state, the lottery mode will be "high probability mode" and the winning support mode will be "30 times" for a predetermined number of times (20 times in this embodiment).・The same effect as in the state of "High Support Mode S" will be performed.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an overview, the process of steps S201 to S210 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update process of steps S211 and S212 is executed in the remaining time.

First, in step S201, control signals based on the control contents of the special display devices 43L, 43R, opening/closing accessory 37, etc. updated in the previous process are sent to each device, and output data such as commands are sent to each sub-side. Execute external output processing such as sending to a control device. Some more detailed examples are listed below.

For example, based on the detection information of the various detection switches described above, it is determined whether or not game balls have entered various winning holes such as the general winning hole 31, and if there has been a winning, the prize balls corresponding to the number of winnings are determined. A payout command is transmitted to the payout control device 311.

Further, if a command for blinking the error display lamp 104 is set, the command is output to the sub-control device 262.

In addition, in the external output process, information for understanding the gaming state is externally output to the hall computer of the game hall, taking into consideration various information such as the lottery mode flag and the jackpot flag described later. Furthermore, output of error information and the like to the hall computer is also executed in this output process.

For example, if a winning error is detected, an on signal (pulse signal) is output to the hall computer of the game hall via a predetermined terminal of the external relay terminal board 240, and if there is no winning error, the turn-off signal is output. A signal is output.

Further, when the decorative pattern display device 42 displays a variable pattern of decorative patterns, a variable pattern command, a pattern command, etc. are transmitted to the sub-control device 262. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 that has input the variation pattern command, symbol command, etc. determines the variation mode of the decorative pattern display device 42 based on the various commands, and displays the variation mode on the decorative pattern display device 42. An instruction is issued to the display control device 45 to perform (variable display).

In step S202, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like the other counters, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their upper limit values (198, 240 in this embodiment), they are each cleared to 0. do. Then, the updated values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

In the following step S203, the prize ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

After that, in step S205, a first display control process is executed. In this process, the control contents of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R are set, as well as the jackpot determination and the decoration on the decorative pattern display device 42. The setting of the symbol fluctuation pattern, etc. is performed. Details of this first display control process will be described later.

In step S206, variable prize winning device control processing is executed. In this process, the control contents of the variable winning device 32, such as what kind of control is to be performed in the variable winning device 32, are set. As a result, when a jackpot or a small win occurs, the opening/closing process of the opening/closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times. Details of the variable prize winning device control process will be described later.

In step S207, a second display control process is executed. In this process, settings such as what kind of control is to be performed on the normal symbol display device 41 and the control content of the normal symbol display device 41 are performed. Details of this second display control processing will be described later.

In step S208, opening/closing accessory control processing is executed. In this process, the control contents of the opening/closing accessory 37, such as what kind of control is to be performed on the opening/closing accessory 37, are set. Details of this opening/closing accessory control process will be described later.

Thereafter, in step S209, it is determined whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. If power-off occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, in step S210, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has arrived, that is, a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment) from the start of the previous normal process. Then, it is determined whether 4 msec) has elapsed. If the predetermined time has already passed, the process moves to step S201, and the processes from step S201 onward are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing. It is executed repeatedly (step S211, step S212).

That is, in step S211, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the upper limit value (599 in this example), it is cleared to 0.

Furthermore, in step S212, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (same as step S202). Specifically, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the upper limit values (198, 240 in this example), they are each cleared to 0. Then, the changed values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

Here, since the execution time of each process in steps S201 to S209 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and fluctuations can be similarly The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated randomly.

Now, if the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S209: YES), it means that the power has been cut off, and the processing from step S213 onward is performed as power outage processing when the power is cut off. be exposed. The power outage process first prohibits the occurrence of each interrupt process in step S213, saves the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 to the stack area in step S214, and saves the value of the stack pointer to the backup area 503a in step S215. to be memorized. Thereafter, in step S216, a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (such as the payout control device 311). Then, in step S217, a RAM determination value is calculated and saved in the backup area 503a. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Thereafter, RAM access is prohibited in step S218, and an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed.

Note that the process in step S209 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in the state of the game performed in steps S201 to S208, or at the end of one cycle of the processes in steps S211 and S212 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at the appropriate timing. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main controller 261, information on the occurrence of power outage is checked at the end of each processing, so the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is smaller than when each processing is in the middle. and can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before the power was cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored, and the processing burden on the main controller 261 can be reduced. . Furthermore, since interrupt processing is prohibited from occurring before data is stored (step S213), data can be prevented from being changed when the power is turned off, and the state before the power is turned off can be reliably memorized. .

Next, the first display control process in step S205 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 26.

In FIG. 26, in step S801, various winning medium flags (medium jackpot flag and medium winning flag), which will be described in detail later, are referred to to determine whether or not it is currently a winning state (in a jackpot state or a small winning state). Determine. Note that the winning state (big winning state and small winning state) includes the middle of the winning state and a predetermined time after the winning state ends. The predetermined time after the winning state ends is the time from when the winning state ends until the normal game (variable display on the special display devices 43L and 43R) starts, and generally during this time period, the decorative symbol display The device 42 displays a display indicating the end of the winning state and various game states and various modes to be provided after the winning. Also, the period from when the variable display is stopped and displayed on the special display devices 43L, 43R and the decorative pattern display device 42 in a manner corresponding to a win until the variable winning device 32 is released (generally during this period) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 to indicate the start of a winning state) is also included in the win.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S801, that is, if the winning state is in progress, the present process is immediately terminated.On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S801, a first display, which will be described in detail later, is displayed in step S802. It is determined whether or not the first or second special display device 43L, 43R (decorative pattern display device 42) is displaying a variable display by looking at the setting status of the medium flag. Specifically, if the first displaying flag is set (in the on state), it is considered to be fluctuating, and if the first displaying flag is cleared (in the off state), the fluctuation display is considered to be in progress. It is considered that the display is in a stopped state, which means that the display is stopped. Although details will be described later, the first display flag is turned on when starting variable display on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R (see step S920, step S807), and When the variable display of the second special display devices 43L and 43R is stopped and displayed (see step S814), it is turned off.

If a negative determination is made in step S802, that is, if the winning state is not in progress and the fluctuating display is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S803, where the fluctuating display (second fluctuating It is determined whether the value of the lower suspension counter Nb that counts the number of suspensions (display) is greater than 0.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S803, that is, if at least one second variable display is held and stored, 1 is subtracted from the lower holding counter Nb in step S804. Note that in this embodiment, if the second variable display is held and stored as a result of the determination process in step S803, the second variable display is executed without executing the first variable display. In other words, even if the first variable display is stored earlier than the second variable display, the second variable display is prioritized and consumed (the first variable display is postponed). ing.

In the following step S805, processing for shifting the data stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the second special fluctuation holding area to the execution area side, from the first pending area to the execution area, and then to the second pending area. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: area→first pending area, third pending area→second pending area, fourth pending area→third pending area. After step S805, in step S806, the process of turning on and off the second hold lamp 46b and the process of causing the fluctuation identification lamp 40 to emit red light are performed, and then the process moves to step S807.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S803, that is, if no second variable display is stored in storage, in step S808, the variable display (first It is determined whether an upper suspension counter Na for counting the number of suspensions (variable display) is greater than 0 or not. If a negative determination is made in step S808, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S808, 1 is subtracted from the upper hold counter Na in step S809. In the following step S810, a process of shifting the data stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift processing is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the first special fluctuation holding area to the execution area side, from the first pending area to the execution area, and then to the second pending area. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: area→first pending area, third pending area→second pending area, fourth pending area→third pending area. After step S810, in step S811, the process of turning on and off the first holding lamp 46a and the process of causing the fluctuation identification lamp 40 to emit blue light are performed, and then the process moves to step S807. In this embodiment, there is one execution area of the special fluctuation holding area, and the data stored in the first special fluctuation holding area and the second special fluctuation holding area are used when performing a fluctuation display based on the data. Then, they will be shifted to a common execution area.

In step S807, variable display setting processing is performed. Here, details of the variable display setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 28.

First, in step S900, a game status check process is executed. It should be noted that the game status check process is similar to the game status check process in step S109 (see FIG. 24), so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Subsequently, in step S901, it is determined whether the variable display corresponds to a small win by determining whether or not the small win winning flag is on.

If it is determined that the win corresponds to a small win, the process moves to step S910. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a small hit, the process moves to step S902.

In step S902, it is determined whether the variable display corresponds to a jackpot by determining whether or not the jackpot winning flag is on.

If it is determined that this corresponds to a jackpot, the process moves to step S903. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is neither a big hit nor a small hit, that is, if it is a loss, the process moves to step S912.

In step S903, whether any of the above-mentioned various probability variable jackpot flags ("16R probability variable jackpot A flag", "16R probability variable jackpot B flag", "4R probability variable jackpot A flag", "4R probability variable jackpot B flag") is on. By determining whether or not the variable display corresponds to a "probable variable jackpot", it is determined whether or not the variable display corresponds to a "probable variable jackpot".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S903, that is, if it is a "probable variable jackpot", a variation pattern is determined in consideration of the variation pattern table corresponding to the "probable variable jackpot" in step S904, and is set in the variation pattern command. . Subsequently, in step S905, the jackpot symbol (in this embodiment, whether it is an odd number symbol or an even number symbol) is determined by considering the symbol table corresponding to the "probable variable jackpot", and the corresponding symbol command (in this embodiment) is determined. Now, set "B1" or "B2", which will be described later. After that, the process moves to step S920.

If a negative determination is made in step S903, the process moves to step S906, and the various normal jackpot flags ("16R normal jackpot A flag", "16R normal jackpot B flag", "4R normal jackpot A flag", "4R normal jackpot A flag", "4R normal jackpot flag", "4R normal jackpot A flag", "4R normal jackpot A flag", "4R normal jackpot A flag", By determining whether any of the "Jackpot B Flag") is on, it is determined whether the variable display corresponds to the "Normal Jackpot". If an affirmative determination is made in step S906, that is, if it is a "normal jackpot", a fluctuation pattern is determined in step S907 by taking into account the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the "normal jackpot", and is set in the fluctuation pattern command. do. Subsequently, in step S908, the jackpot symbol (in this embodiment, whether it is an odd number symbol or an even number symbol) is determined by considering the symbol table corresponding to the "normal jackpot", and the corresponding symbol command (in this embodiment) is determined. Now, set "B1" or "B2", which will be described later. After that, the process moves to step S920.

However, in this embodiment, as described above, depending on the type of symbols stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, it is impossible to determine the gaming state such as the lottery mode that is awarded after the end of the jackpot. In other words, if it is a "probable variable jackpot", the "odd number symbol" will be stopped and displayed, and if it is a "normal jackpot", the "even number symbol" will be stopped and displayed, and so on, the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol and the jackpot type. are not clearly associated with each other, and in this embodiment, the above various tables are used to determine the predetermined fluctuations depending on the type of various jackpots, for example, if it is a "probable variable jackpot", it is likely to be stopped and displayed with "odd symbols". The tables are simply divided so that the appearance rates of patterns and designs are different. Therefore, for example, at the time of a jackpot, a configuration may be adopted in which a variable pattern or a stop symbol is selected based on one jackpot table, regardless of the type of jackpot such as "probable jackpot" or "normal jackpot".

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S906, the process moves to step S909, and it is determined whether or not the JUB jackpot flag is on, thereby determining whether the variable display corresponds to "JUB jackpot". Determine whether If an affirmative determination is made in step S909, that is, if it is a "JUB jackpot", the process moves to step S910.

In step S910, a variation pattern is determined with reference to the variation pattern table corresponding to "JUB jackpot" and "small win", and is set in the variation pattern command. Thereafter, in step S911, a symbol command corresponding to the chance symbol (in this embodiment, "B6", which will be described later) is set, and the process proceeds to step S920.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S902, that is, if it is "missing", it is determined in step S912 whether or not the front and rear missing flags are on.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S912, that is, in the case of "out-of-front reach", in step S913, a fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "out-of-front reach", and the fluctuation pattern command is , and turn off the front and back out-of-line flags. Subsequently, in step S914, a symbol command (in this embodiment, "B3", which will be described later) corresponding to the front-back out-of-place symbol is set. After that, the process moves to step S920.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step 912, it is determined in step S915 whether or not the flag other than front/rear deviation is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S915, that is, if it is a "reach other than front/back off", a fluctuation pattern is determined in step S916 with reference to the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "reach other than front/back off", Set it to the fluctuation pattern command and turn off the flags other than those that are out of order. Subsequently, in step S917, a symbol command (in this embodiment, "B4", which will be described later) corresponding to a symbol other than front and back off is set. After that, the process moves to step S920.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S915, that is, if the result is "completely off", then in step S918, the offsetting variation pattern is determined by taking into consideration the variation pattern table corresponding to "completely off", and the variation pattern command is Set to . Subsequently, in step S919, a symbol command corresponding to a completely missed symbol (in this embodiment, "B5", which will be described later) is set. After that, the process moves to step S920.

Here, for convenience, the variation pattern table and variation pattern command will be explained. In this embodiment, a fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the above-mentioned "probable variable jackpot" (hereinafter referred to as "probable variable jackpot/variable pattern table"), a variable pattern table corresponding to "normal jackpot", "JUB jackpot" and "small win" are used. , a fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "reach outside the front and back", a fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "reach other than the front and back", and a fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "completely off" (hereinafter referred to as "reach when completely off"). A plurality of variable pattern tables (referred to as variable pattern tables) are provided depending on the gaming status (values of gaming status determination value Xj "0" to "7").

For example, regarding the probability variable jackpot/variable pattern table, as shown in FIG. 45(a), at "address 100" which is the reference address, the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj is "0", which corresponds to the "normal state". A probability variable jackpot time/variation pattern table is stored.

Similarly, at "address 101", a variable probability/variable jackpot time/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the value of gaming state determination value Xj of "1" is stored, and at "address 102", the value of gaming state determination value Xj is "2". A variable probability jackpot time/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "103" is stored, a variable probability jackpot time/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the gaming state judgment value Xj of "3" is stored at "address 104" , when the variable pattern table is stored, when the gaming state determination value Xj corresponds to the value "4", the fluctuation pattern table is stored, and at "address 105", when the variable probability jackpot corresponds to the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "5", A variable pattern table is stored, and at "address 106", a variable pattern table for a probability variable jackpot corresponding to the value "6" of the gaming state judgment value A probability variable jackpot time/variation pattern table corresponding to the value "7" is stored.

In addition, regarding the complete failure/fluctuation pattern table, as shown in FIG. 45(b), at "address 700" which is the reference address, the gaming state judgment value Xj corresponds to the "normal state" of "0". A completely off time/fluctuation pattern table is stored.

Similarly, at "address 701", a complete failure/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the value of gaming state judgment value Xj of "1" is stored, and at "address 702", the value of gaming state judgment value Xj is "2". A complete loss/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "703" is stored, a complete loss/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the gaming state judgment value "3" is stored at "address 704", , when the gaming state judgment value Xj corresponds to "4", the variation pattern table is stored, and at "address 705", when the gaming state judgment value Xj corresponds to "5", the completely off state/ A fluctuation pattern table is stored, and at "address 706", a fluctuation pattern table for when the gaming state determination value Xj is completely off corresponding to "6" is stored; A completely off time/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the value "7" is stored.

Although not shown, there are other fluctuation pattern tables corresponding to the above-mentioned "normal jackpot", fluctuation pattern tables corresponding to "JUB jackpot" and "small win", fluctuation pattern tables corresponding to "foreign and off reach", and As for the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "reach other than front and back misses", as in the case of the above-mentioned variable pattern table for variable jackpot and fluctuating pattern table for complete miss, the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj is "0" ~ A plurality of table groups corresponding to "7" are stored in consecutive numbers starting from a predetermined reference address.

Therefore, when determining the fluctuation pattern in step S904, step S907, step S910, step S913, step S916, and step S918, first, based on the gaming state determination value Xj specified in the gaming state check process (step S900), Next, a process is performed to select a table corresponding to a predetermined gaming state (values of gaming state determination value Xj from "0" to "7") from a plurality of table groups. At this time, the address where the table to be selected is stored is specified by adding the value of the gaming state judgment value can do. In other words, the value of the gaming state determination value Xj plays the role of the offset value as it is.

Then, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the selected fluctuation pattern table (for example, the variable jackpot time fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the "normal state (Xj = 0)" stored in "address 100": see Figure 46). and set the corresponding variation pattern command.

The variable pattern command in this embodiment is composed of 2 bytes, and the upper 4 bits of the upper byte are composed of information specifying the gaming state. In this embodiment, the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is set as is. Furthermore, the lower 4 bits of the upper byte are made up of information that specifies the jackpot type, etc., and the 8 bits of the lower byte are made up of information that specifies the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time, reach type, etc.).

For example, as can be seen by referring to the variable probability jackpot/variation pattern table related to the normal state (Xj=0) [see Figure 45(a)], in the probability variable jackpot/variation pattern command related to the normal state, the upper 4 bits are set to "0" which is the value of the gaming state determination value Xj, and the following 4 bits are set to "F" indicating "probability variable jackpot". Then, the remaining 8 bits of the lower byte are set with values that specify the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503. Note that the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these variation pattern commands and the variation modes (effect patterns) of decorative symbols in a table, and when a variation pattern command is received, the variation corresponding to the variation pattern command is The pattern (performance pattern) becomes executable.

Next, the symbol commands will be explained in detail. The symbol command is a command for causing the sub-control device 262 to determine the symbol to be stopped. In this embodiment, there are six categories: combinations of odd-numbered jackpot symbols, combinations of even-numbered jackpot symbols, combinations of front and back out-of-place symbols, combinations of symbols other than front and back out-of-place symbols, combinations of completely out-of-place symbols, and combinations of chance symbols. is specified. These categories are indicated by, for example, "B1", "B2", "B3", "B4", "B5", and "B6", and any one of these is set as a symbol command. On the other hand, the relationship between these commands and stop symbols is stored in the sub-control device 262 in the form of a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 displays a stop symbol corresponding to the symbol command.

The combination of odd-numbered jackpot symbols is a combination of symbols consisting of the numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9, and "B1" is set in the symbol command corresponding to the combination of odd-numbered jackpot symbols. Ru. Then, when "B1" indicating an odd jackpot symbol is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 selects one of the symbol combinations consisting of the zeros of the numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9. One is determined as the stop symbol.

The combination of even-numbered jackpot symbols is a combination of symbols consisting of the numbers 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8, and "B2" is set in the symbol command corresponding to the combination of even-numbered jackpot symbols. Ru. Then, when "B2" indicating an even jackpot symbol is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 selects one of the symbol combinations consisting of the zeros of the numbers 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8. One is determined as the stop symbol.

The combination of front and back off symbols corresponds to the "front and back off reach" in which after a reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one position before and after the reach symbol and stops, and corresponds to the combination of front and back off symbols. “B3” is set in the symbol command.

The combination of symbols other than front and back off corresponds to the "reach other than front and back" where the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and back of the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and the combination of symbols other than front and rear off is the pattern that corresponds to the combination of symbols other than front and back off. "B4" is set in the command.

The combination of complete miss symbols corresponds to a "complete miss" in which no reach occurs, and "B5" is set in the symbol command corresponding to the complete miss symbol combination.

Moreover, "B6" is set to the symbol command corresponding to the combination of chance symbols. Incidentally, there is only one type of chance symbol, and in this example, as described above, the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in each symbol display area are "3", "4", and "1" from the top.

Although details will be described later, when "B3" to "B5" are set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 stops the combination of symbols stored in the counter buffer of the corresponding RAM 553. Determine as. Specifically, when "B3" indicating a combination of front and rear out-of-reach symbols is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 that has received the symbol command will select the front and rear out-of-reach symbols stored in the front and rear out-of-reach symbol buffer of the RAM 553. A combination of symbols corresponding to a missed reach is determined as a stop symbol. When "B4" indicating a combination of symbols other than front and back misses is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols corresponding to the reach other than front and rear misses stored in the reach symbol buffer other than front and rear misses in the RAM 553 is sent to the sub-control device. 262 is determined as the stopping symbol. When "B5" indicating a combination of completely missed symbols is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 selects the symbol combination corresponding to a completely missed symbol stored in the completely missed symbol buffer of the RAM 553 as a stop symbol. decide.

Further, when "A6" is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 selects a chance symbol as the combination of decorative symbols.

Incidentally, the variation pattern command and symbol command set as described above are output in an external output process (step S201) which will be described later. The sub-control device 262 that has input these commands determines the variation mode of the decorative pattern display device 42 based on the commands, and displays the variation mode on the decorative pattern display device 42 (variation display). An instruction is issued to the display control device 45.

Now, in step S920, a start setting process is performed that indicates that the conditions for performing variable display on the special display devices 43L and 43R are satisfied. In this start setting process, the first display flag indicating whether or not variable display is being performed on the special display devices 43L and 43R is turned on, and a first display timer setting process is performed.

The first display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time of the fluctuation display) in the special display devices 43L and 43R, and is taken into account when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation display. .

The variable display time of the special display devices 43L and 43R in this embodiment is set to a value corresponding to the variation pattern of the decorative symbol selected by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2. Based on the settings of the first display timer, when a control signal to start variable display is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the next external output process of normal processing, the special display device Variable display starts at 43L and 43R. After step S920 ends, the variable display setting process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 26, if an affirmative determination is made in step S802, that is, if variable display is in progress, the process advances to step S812, and a first display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the value of the first display timer is decremented by 4 msec. For example, when the fluctuation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), "2500" is set for the first display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

Next, the process advances to step S813, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined variable time has elapsed, taking into consideration the value of the first display timer after the above-mentioned subtraction. At this time, when the predetermined variable time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the first display timer becomes "0", an affirmative determination is made in step S813.

If a negative determination is made in step S813, in step S817, switching display settings are made to continue the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R, and the present process ends. Note that, based on the settings of the switching display settings, a control signal to perform switching display is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the external output processing in the next normal process. As a result, switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is realized at the timing of the first display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S813, the first display flag is canceled (turned off) in step S814, and a stop display setting for performing a stop display is performed on the special display devices 43L and 43R in step S815. .

In addition, based on the setting contents of the above-mentioned stop display setting, a control signal to perform a stop display is output to the special display devices 43L and 42R in the external output process in the next normal process. For example, in the case of "16R probability variable jackpot A", "9-" is stopped and displayed (for example, lit for only a few seconds).

Subsequently, in step S816, a variation end setting process is performed, and then this process is ended. Here, the variation end setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 27.

First, in step S1001, it is determined whether the stop display corresponds to a jackpot or a small win, taking into account the jackpot winning flag and the small winning winning flag. Here, if the game corresponds to a big win or a small win, the process moves to step S1002, and win settings are made. Specifically, setting processing is performed for the medium jackpot flag, medium small win flag, first variable flag, first variable timer, open number counter, winning counter Vx, etc. After step S1002 ends, the variation end setting process ends.

The jackpot flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the jackpot state is in progress, and here, "1" indicating the occurrence of the jackpot state is set as the flag value (turned on).

The small hit medium flag is state determination information for determining whether or not a small win is in progress. Here, like the jackpot medium flag, "1" indicating the occurrence of a small win is set as the flag value. (turned on).

The first variable flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the variable prize winning device 32 is in the open state.

The first variable timer is a measuring means for measuring the opening time of the variable winning device 32 (time when the special prize state occurs), the interval between each special prize state, etc., and is defined from the start or end of opening of the opening/closing plate 32b. This is taken into consideration when determining whether or not time has elapsed. In the win setting process of step S1002, predetermined values corresponding to various wins are set with reference to the opening/closing pattern control table (see FIG. 47). For example, if the first time is the above-mentioned "long open" like "16R guaranteed variable jackpot A", "7500" is set in the first variable timer, and like "JUB jackpot" the first time is the above-mentioned "short open". In this case, "100" is set to the first variable timer. As a result, the maximum opening time (specified time) per opening/closing operation of the opening/closing plate 32b is set to "30 seconds" or "0.4 seconds".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 47, the opening/closing pattern control table includes the number of occurrences (number of rounds) of the special prize state in each winning state, the opening time of the opening/closing plate 32b in each special prize state (each round), and the information between each special prize state. The interval time etc. are set in advance.

The open number counter is used to determine the number of times the special prize state occurs during the jackpot state or the small win state, that is, the number of times the opening/closing process (“long open” or “short open”) of the variable winning device 32 is executed. This is the status determination information. In the win setting process in step S1002, initial values corresponding to various wins are set with reference to the opening/closing pattern control table. For example, in the case of "16R probability variable jackpot A", "16" indicating 16 times is set, and in the case of "JUB jackpot", the total of 5 "short openings" and 15 "long openings" is set. "20" indicating 20 times is set as the initial value.

The winning counter Vx is a winning counting means that counts the number of game balls that have won into the variable winning device 32. In this embodiment, in the switch reading process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the variable winning device 32 based on the detection information of the count switch 223, and whether or not there is a winning in the variable winning device 32. If it is determined that there is a winning prize, the value of the prize winning counter Vx is incremented by 1.

In the win setting process of step S1002, the opening/closing pattern control table is taken into account, and the specified number K1 is the maximum expected number of winnings to the variable winning device 32 per one opening/closing operation (one special prize state) of the opening/closing plate 32b. Configure settings. As described above, the prescribed number K1 is predetermined for each opening type (operation mode of the opening/closing member related to one opening/closing operation) such as "long opening" or "short opening". For example, if it is a "long open", the prescribed number K1 is set to "10", and if it is a "short open", the prescribed number K1 is set to "3".

In the win setting process in step S1002, an opening command that announces the start of a big win or a small win is also set. However, in the case of a "JUB jackpot", the opening command is set after five "short openings" are completed (such as special prize state start processing in step S1217, which will be described later). As a result, in the case of a "JUB jackpot", the jackpot notification performance etc. will be performed after the five "short openings" are completed, and up to this point, it cannot be distinguished from the case of a small win.

Now, in step S1001, if it is determined that the game does not correspond to a jackpot or a small win, that is, the jackpot winning flag and the small winning winning flag are off, the process moves to step S1003.

In step S1003, it is determined whether the counter value of the support number counter is "0". The support counter is a means to measure the duration of the "high support mode" (how many times the fluctuation is displayed), and as described later, after the jackpot ends, the values corresponding to various jackpots are set as the counter value. Ru.

Here, if the counter value of the support number counter is "0", this process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the support number counter is set (the counter value is other than "0"), it is assumed that the high support mode is being set, and in step S1004, the value of the support number counter is subtracted by 1. . In step S1004, a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj is also performed. After that, the process moves to step S1005.

In step S1005, it is determined whether the counter value of the support number counter is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the current variable display is the predetermined number of variable displays after the end of the jackpot (after the high support mode is applied). Here, if the value of the support number counter is "0", the value of the support mode flag is switched to "A0 (H)" indicating "low support mode" in step S1006, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1005 that the counter value of the support number counter is not "0", the process is immediately terminated.

Next, the variable prize winning device control process in step S206 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 29. The function of the main control device 261 that executes the variable prize winning device control process in step S206 constitutes the specific opening/closing control means in this embodiment.

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether the medium jackpot flag or the medium small win flag is on. If a negative determination is made here, the process is directly terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1202, the count value of the first variable timer is subtracted by 1 in the subsequent step S1202.

In the following step S1203, it is determined whether the first variable flag is on. If an affirmative determination is made here, that is, if the variable winning device 32 is in the open state, the process advances to step S1204, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the first variable timer is "0", that is, if the variable winning device 32 is in the open state. It is determined whether there is an opening time (specified time "30 seconds" or "0.4 seconds") remaining for each opening/closing operation ("long opening" or "short opening").

If a negative determination is made in step S1204, the process proceeds to step S1205, and it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter Vx is equal to or greater than the specified number K1, that is, the number of game balls that have won into the variable winning device 32 in one special prize state. It is determined whether or not the number of pitches has reached the maximum expected number of prizes (specified number of "10" or "3"). If a negative determination is made in step S1205, that is, if the timing to close the variable prize winning device 32 (timing to end the special prize state) has not yet arrived, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1204 or step S1205, the process advances to step S1206, and a first variable timer setting process is performed.

Here, the first variable timer indicates whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the special prize state (for example, whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of a jackpot or small win, or whether the next time has passed since the end of a predetermined special prize state). In order to determine whether the interval until the start of the special prize state has elapsed, etc., a predetermined value (for example, a value "750" corresponding to "3 seconds") or "250" corresponding to "1 second") is set.

After that, the process advances to step S1207, and it is determined whether the counter value of the open number counter is "0", that is, whether the number of executions of the special prize state ("long open" or "short open") has reached the specified number of times. judge.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1207, an opening end setting process is performed in step S1210, and the present process ends. In the end setting process of step S1210, the first variable flag is turned off and the winning end flag is turned on.

If a negative determination is made in step S1207, that is, if the number of executions of the special prize state (“long release” or “short release”) has not reached the specified number of times, special prize sending processing is performed in step S1211, and this processing is continued. finish.

In the special prize sending process of step S1211, the value of the open number counter is subtracted by 1, and the first variable flag is turned off. As a result, the opening/closing process is repeated until the number of executions of the special prize state reaches the specified number of times.

Now, if a negative determination is made in step S1203, that is, within a predetermined time after the end of the special prize state (within a predetermined time after the end of winning, or during the interval between special prize states), the process advances to step S1212. , it is determined whether the value of the first variable timer is "0".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1212, that is, if a predetermined period of time has passed since the end of the special prize state and it is time to move to the next process (start of the next special prize state or start of the normal game), , the process moves to step S1215. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1212, the process is immediately terminated.

In step S1215, it is determined whether or not to end the jackpot state or small win state, taking into consideration the winning end flag.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1215, a winning end setting process is performed in step S1216, and then this process is ended.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1215, special prize state start processing is performed in step S1217, and then this processing is ended.

In the win end setting process in step S1216, the medium jackpot flag or the medium small win flag is turned off, and the lottery mode flag switching process, the support mode flag switching process, the support number counter setting process, and the game status notification command setting process , setting processing of an ending command that announces the end of the jackpot or small win, etc. are performed.

In the lottery mode flag switching process, the lottery mode flag is switched and set based on the various jackpot flags described above. As a result, when the "high probability mode" is set after the jackpot ends (various "probability variable jackpot flag" or "JUB jackpot flag" is turned on), "53 (H)" indicating the occurrence of "high probability mode" is set as a flag value. On the other hand, when the "low probability mode" is set (various "normal jackpot flags" are on), "50 (H)" indicating the occurrence of the "low probability mode" is set as the flag value. The function of switching the lottery mode flag constitutes the probability state switching means in this embodiment.

However, when the small winning winning flag is on, the lottery mode flag switching process is not performed, and the flag value related to the original mode is set as is. For example, if the "high probability mode" is set before the occurrence of a small win (the flag value of the lottery mode flag is "53 (H)"), even after the small win ends, the "high probability mode" (lottery mode The flag value "53 (H)") of the flag is set.

In the support mode flag switching process, the support mode flag is switched and set based on the various jackpot flags described above. As a result, if "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode" or "50 times high support mode" is given after the jackpot ends, the flag value will be "A1 (H)" is set as the flag value, "A2 (H)" is set as the flag value in the case of "30 times/high support mode S", and "A2 (H)" is set as the flag value in the case of "until next time/high support mode". "A3(H)" is set as the flag value. The function of switching the support mode flag constitutes the ball entering state switching means in this embodiment.

In the support number counter setting process, the support number counter is switched and set based on the various jackpot flags described above. As a result, if "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode" or "50 times high support mode" is granted after the jackpot ends, the support As the value of the number counter, "20" corresponds to 20 times of fluctuation display, "30" corresponds to 30 times of fluctuation display, "40" corresponds to 40 times of fluctuation display, or "50" corresponds to 50 times of fluctuation display. Set. Further, when "30 times/high support mode S" is provided, "30" corresponding to 30 times of variable display is set as the value of the support number counter. When the "until next time/high support mode" is provided, the value of the support number counter is set to a value that is virtually impossible to reach (for example, "99999" corresponding to 99999 times of fluctuation display).

The gaming state notification command is a command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the gaming state that will be set after the end of the jackpot. In setting the command, first a game status check process is performed. Since the game status check process is the same as the game status check process in step S109 (see FIG. 24), detailed explanation will be omitted here.

The gaming status notification command includes a gaming status determination value Xj related to the new gaming status ascertained through the gaming status checking process. As will be described later, the sub-control device 262 that receives this switches the gaming state (gaming state determination value Xj) that it knows to a new gaming state (gaming state determination value Xj). Note that the gaming state notification command may be omitted, and instead of this, the gaming state determination value Xj may be included in, for example, an ending command that announces the end of the jackpot state.

Incidentally, the jackpot winning flag, the small winning winning flag, and various "jackpot flags" are turned off after various processes such as the above lottery mode flag switching process are completed. In addition, when the winning setting (step S1002) is performed in the variation end setting process in FIG. A configuration may also be adopted in which the "high probability mode" is interrupted.

In the special prize state start process of step S1217, the first variable flag is turned on, and the opening time ("7500" or "100") related to the next special prize state is set to the first variable value with reference to the opening/closing pattern control table. In addition to setting the timer, the specified number K1 for the next special prize state is also set. Furthermore, the value of the prize winning counter Vx is reset to "0".

Based on the on/off status of the first variable flag, various control signals are output to the variable winning device 32 in the next external output process of the normal process. When the first variable flag is on, a control signal is output to the variable winning device 32 to open the big winning hole 32a, and the big winning hole 32a becomes open. On the other hand, when the first variable flag is off, a control signal to close the grand prize opening 32a is output to the variable winning device 32, and the grand prize opening 32a is brought into a closed state.

Next, the second display control process in step S207 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 30.

In FIG. 30, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol display device 41 is displaying a variable display by checking the setting status of the second display flag indicating whether or not the normal symbol display device 41 is displaying a variable display. Determine. Specifically, when the second displaying flag is on, it is assumed that the normal symbol display device 41 is displaying a variable display, and when the second display flag is off, the normal symbol display device 41 displays a variable display. It is considered that the display is in a stopped state, which means that the display is stopped.

If a negative determination is made in step S2101, the process advances to step S2102, and it is determined whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than zero. At this time, if the value of the normal hold counter Nc is 0, the process is immediately terminated.

Further, if the variable display is not in progress and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is >0, the process advances to step S2103. In step S2103, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc. In step S2104, processing for shifting the data stored in the normal fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift processing is a process that sequentially shifts the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the normal fluctuation holding area to the execution area side: first pending area → execution area, second pending area → The data in each area is shifted in the following order: first reserved area, third reserved area → second reserved area, fourth reserved area → third reserved area.

Thereafter, in step S2105, start setting processing is executed. In this process, a process is performed to indicate that the conditions for performing a variable display on the normal symbol display device 41 are satisfied. Specifically, the second display flag is turned on, and a second display timer setting process is performed. The second display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time) of the fluctuation display performed on the normal symbol display device 41, and is taken into account when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation display. be done.

In this embodiment, in the "low support mode", the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is set to 2 seconds, so "500" is set to the second display timer. . Further, in the "high support mode", since the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is set to 0.4 seconds, "100" is set to the second display timer.

Based on the settings in the start setting process, if a control signal to start variable display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output process of the next normal process, the normal symbol display device 41 will display the variable display. Display starts. As described above, the normal symbol display device 41 is configured to display "○" or "×" as a normal symbol by lighting up, and if the displayed symbol is "○", it will be displayed as "×" or "×". ”, the display is switched to “○”. Then, after step S2105 ends, the second display control process ends.

Now, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, that is, if variable display is being performed on the normal symbol display device 41, the process proceeds to step S2106, and a second display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the second display timer is decremented by 1.

Next, the process advances to step S2107, and it is determined whether the count value of the second display timer is "0", that is, whether the variable time has elapsed. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2107, the second display flag is turned off in step S2108, and in step S2109, the normal symbol stop display setting for performing a stop display on the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. Then, based on the setting contents of this normal symbol stop display setting, a control signal to perform a stop display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output process in the next normal process. That is, in the case of a win, the "○" symbol (winning symbol) is stopped and displayed (for example, lit for a few seconds), and in the case of a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed.

In addition, as mentioned above, it is determined whether or not it is a win based on the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal fluctuation holding area. This process constitutes the third lottery in this embodiment, and the function of the main control device 261 that performs this process constitutes the third lottery means.

Specifically, among the numbers 0 to 9 of the normal symbol random number counter C4, the winning values are two, "0 and 1" in "low support mode", and "0 to 7" in "high support mode". There are 8 pieces.

Next, the process advances to step S2110, where a variation end setting process is performed, and this process ends. In this process, if the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process for opening/closing the opening/closing accessory 37 is performed. Specifically, the second variable flag is turned on and the open time is set in the second variable timer.

The second variable flag is state determination information for determining whether the opening/closing accessory 37 is in the open state.

The second variable timer is a means for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the opening/closing accessory 37, and is taken into account when determining whether a prescribed time has elapsed from the start of opening. In this embodiment, the opening time of the opening/closing accessory 37 is different between the "high support mode" and the "low support mode", and in the "high support mode", "1000" is set for the second variable timer. In the "low support mode", "100" is set for the second variable timer.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2107, a switching display setting is performed in step S2111 to continue the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41, and the present process is ended. Then, based on the setting contents of this switching display setting, a control signal to perform switching display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, if the current lighting is "○", the display is switched to "x", and if the current lighting is "x", it is switched to "○". As a result, the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized at the timing of the second display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

Next, the opening/closing accessory control process in step S208 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether the second variable flag indicating whether the opening/closing accessory 37 is in the open state is on. Here, if it is determined that the second variable flag is not on (the opening/closing accessory 37 is in the closed state), the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, that is, if the second variable flag is on, it is assumed that the opening/closing accessory 37 is in the open state, and a second variable timer subtraction process is performed in step S2202. Each time this process is performed, the value of the second variable timer is decremented by one.

Next, the process advances to step S2203, and it is determined whether or not the specified open time has elapsed, with reference to the value of the second variable timer after the above-mentioned subtraction. Here, an affirmative determination is made in step S2203 when the specified opening time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the second variable timer becomes "0". If a negative determination is made here, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, the process moves to step S2204, where an end setting process is performed, and then this process ends. In the termination setting process of step S2204, a process of turning off the second variable flag is performed.

Based on the on/off status of the second variable flag, various control signals are output to the opening/closing accessory 37 in the next external output process of the normal process. When the second variable flag is on, a control signal is output to the opening/closing accessory 37 to open the movable blade 37a, and the opening/closing accessory 37 is placed in the open state. On the other hand, when the second variable flag is off, a control signal to close the movable blade 37a is output to the opening/closing accessory 37, and the opening/closing accessory 37 enters the closed state. As a result, it becomes impossible for the game ball to enter the lower starting prize opening 33B.

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, reception interrupt processing will first be explained with reference to FIG. 32, and then main processing will be explained with reference to FIG. 33.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the reception interrupt process executed by the payout control device 311. The reception interrupt process is a process that is interrupted and executed when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, other processing executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is put on standby, and reception interrupt processing is executed. When the reception interrupt processing is executed, first, in step S3001, the command sent from the main control device 261 is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513, and in step S3002, the command sent from the main control device 261 is stored in order to remember that the command was sent. Turn on the command reception flag and end this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is also used to store the next received command in the next storage area. is updated.

Note that in this embodiment, the reception process of a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is performed by an interrupt process that is executed when the command is received. In the timer interrupt process, before the command determination process (step S3201) is performed, it is checked whether a command has been received, and if the command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on, and if no command is received, the process may proceed to command determination processing. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not a command has been received by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main processing of the payout control device 311 will be explained with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the payout control device 311, and this main processing is started upon resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step S3101, initial setting processing upon power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, in step S3103, RAM access is permitted, and in step S3104, an external interrupt vector is set.

Thereafter, in step S3106, it is determined whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. If power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step S3107, and in the following step S3108, whether the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off is determined. In other words, the validity of the backup is determined. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 513. Note that it is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup based on whether the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly saved.

If the power-off occurrence information is not set in step S3106, or if an abnormality in backup is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) in step S3108, proceed to the RAM 513 initialization processing from step S3115 onward. Transition.

In step S3115, the entire area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3116, the initial value of the RAM 513 is set. Thereafter, in step S3117, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and the process moves to step S3114 to permit interrupts.

On the other hand, on condition that the power-off occurrence information is set in step S3106 and that the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step S3108, process). That is, in step S3109, the stack pointer before the power cut is restored, in step S3110, the information on the occurrence of the power cut is cleared, and in step S3111, the payout permission flag that permits the payout of prize balls is cleared. Further, in step S3112, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and in step S3113, the used registers are restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Furthermore, in step S3114, interrupts are permitted.

After the interrupt is permitted in step S3114, in the process of step S3122, it is determined whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the power-off occurrence information is set, it means that the power has been cut off, and therefore, the processing from step S3123 onward is performed as power outage processing when the power is cut off. The power outage process first prohibits the occurrence of each interrupt process in step S3123, and executes a command determination process to be described later in the next step S3124. After that, in step S3125, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved to the stack area, in step S3126, the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 513a, and in step S3127, the RAM judgment value is calculated and the contents of the registers are saved in the backup area 513a. RAM access is prohibited in step S3128, and an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 513.

Note that in the process of step S3122, information on the occurrence of power-off is checked after the process performed at power-on is completed, so the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is smaller than when each process is in progress. less and can be easily memorized. In addition, when returning to the state before the power was cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily restored, and the processing load on the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

Next, timer interrupt processing of the payout control device 311 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timer interrupt processing is activated periodically (in this embodiment, every 2 msec).

In the timer interrupt processing, first, a command from the main control device 261 is acquired, and a determination process for the command is performed (step S3201). This command determination process will be described below with reference to FIG. 35.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing command determination processing performed by the payout control device 311. In the command determination process (steps S3124, S3201), first, it is determined in step S3301 whether or not the command reception flag is turned on. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from the main controller 261 is received in the above-mentioned reception interrupt process (see FIG. 32).

If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is off, this process ends because no new command has been received from the main controller 261. On the other hand, if the command reception flag is determined to be on in step S3301, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing in steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

The type of command read from the RAM 513 is determined in steps S3304 to S3306. In step S3304, it is determined whether the command sent from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, in step S3305 it is determined whether it is a payout return command, and in step S3306 it is determined whether it is a prize ball command. It is determined whether or not.

If the command sent from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined in step S3307 whether or not the payout permission flag is already turned on. If the payout permission flag is turned off, the main Since the initialization of the RAM 513 has been instructed by the control device 261, the work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. Thereafter, in step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on, and permission for payout of prize balls is set.

As described above, the main control device 261 initializes the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 initializes the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. Therefore, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are approximately the same. Therefore, due to the timing of initialization being shifted, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command sent from the main control device 261, the RAM 513 will be initialized, making it impossible to perform control corresponding to the received command, etc. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of harmful effects. Further, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, it is possible to reliably set permission to pay out prize balls.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag has already been turned on in step S3307, the command determination process is ended without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and initializing the RAM 513. That is, the process in step S3307 prohibits the RAM 513 from being initialized with the payout permission flag set. Note that the payout initialization command is a command that is sent only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on, so it will not be received with the payout permission flag turned on, and in such a case, It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 recognized it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if you clear the work area of the RAM 513 (step S3308) and set the initial value of the RAM 513 (step S3309) while the payout permission flag is on, there may be problems such as not being paid out if prize balls remain. This will cause a negative effect and cause a loss to the player, but since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is on, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a loss.

Further, if the command sent from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power was cut off. In order to permit the payout of prize balls, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. That is, when there is information on the occurrence of a power cutoff and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power cutoff, the payout of prize balls is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, it means that the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is finished, so the read pointer changes to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

Furthermore, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), the received number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls and stored in step S3310. , turns on the payout permission flag in step S3311 to permit payout of prize balls. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer) and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in a predetermined buffer area. and memorize it. Since the prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls are paid out based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main control device 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command that instructs the payout of the prize balls. . Further, when a prize ball command is received, payout permission is immediately set, so prize balls can be paid out quickly in response to winnings. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, it means that the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is finished, so the read pointer changes to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

Note that if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is not a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO), a payout return command (step S3305: NO), and a prize ball command (step S3306: NO), The command determination process ends without turning on the payout permission flag.

Here, the explanation will be returned to the flowchart of FIG. 34. When the command determination process is completed, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not the payout permission flag has been turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, the process is directly ended. In other words, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being paid out before the command is transmitted from the main control device 261.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, launch permission is set for the launch control device 312 in step S3203, and the state return switch 321 is checked in step S3204. Execute the return operation. Through this process, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor, the dispensing motor is rotated in forward and reverse directions, thereby eliminating the ball jam (returning to normal state). .

Thereafter, in step S3205, a lower tray full state or a lower tray full release state is set depending on the change in the state of the lower tray 15. That is, the full state of the lower tray 15 is determined based on the detection signal of the lower tray full switch, and when the lower tray is full, the lower tray full state setting is executed, and when the lower tray is no longer full. , execute the setting for the lower tray full release state. Further, in step S3206, a tank ball absent state (bulb out state) or a tank ball free state (ball present state) is set in accordance with a change in the state of the tank ball. In other words, the no-tank-bulb state is determined based on the detection signal of the no-tank-bulb switch, the special setting for the no-tank bulb condition and the no-tank bulb condition is executed, and the special setting for the no-tank bulb condition and the no-tank bulb release condition are performed. Run the settings.

After that, in step S3207, it is determined whether there is a condition that should be notified, such as an error condition, and if there is a condition that should be notified, it is notified.

Subsequently, a payout control process for prize balls and rental balls is executed. Specifically, a payout number setting process is performed in step S3208, a motor control state acquisition process is performed in step S3209, and a motor drive process is performed in step S3210.

In step S3211, the dispensing motor 358a is driven to execute the ball discharging process, on the condition that the state return switch 321 is checked and the ball is not in a state where it is not possible to dislodge the ball, and that the ball discharging operation has not started. In the following step S3212, control of the vibrator 360 (vibrator motor control) is executed on the condition that the ball is clogged. Thereafter, the process returns to the beginning of the timer interrupt process.

Next, normal processing of the sub-control device 262 will be explained with reference to FIG. 36. Note that this normal processing is a timer interrupt processing that is activated periodically (in this embodiment, every 2 msec).

In this normal processing, first in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port 554 is checked, and it is determined whether the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is being received.

If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 553 in step S3902. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control device 261.

Note that the ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area, and when commands are stored in all storage areas, the storage area is It is configured to return to the starting point and update the command. Therefore, when a command is stored or read, the storage pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

In the following step S3903, command determination processing is performed. Here, the command determination process will be explained with reference to FIG. 39.

First, in step S4101, the received command is read from the command buffer of the RAM 553. In the following step S4102, it is determined whether the command is an initialization command, in step S4103 it is determined whether it is a return command, in step S4104 it is determined whether or not it is a pending control command, and in step S4110 In step S4111, it is determined whether it is a gaming state notification command, in step S4111 it is determined whether it is a variable pattern command, and in step S4112 it is determined whether it is a symbol command.

If the command sent from the main controller 261 is an initialization command, it means that the main controller 261 has instructed to initialize the RAM 553 when the power is turned on, so the RAM 553 is cleared in step S4105, and the RAM 553 is cleared in step S4106. Set the initial value of RAM 553. As a result, the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553 stores the value "0" of the gaming state determination value Xj corresponding to the "normal state" which is the initial setting. After that, this process ends.

Furthermore, if the command sent from the main control device 261 is a return command (step S4102: NO, step S4103: YES), the main control device 261 returns to the state before the power was cut off, so the subsystem that does not have a backup function In step S4107, the control device 262 reads the value of the gaming state determination value Xj (any one of "0" to "7") included in the return command, and stores it in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553. After that, this process ends.

Furthermore, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a hold control command (step S4103: NO, step S4104: YES), in step S4108, various information (such as jackpot determination information and jackpot type) included in the hold control command is processed. information, information indicating which of the starting winning openings 33A and 33B is the trigger for the variable display) is stored in the sub-variation holding area, and this processing ends.

The sub-fluctuation reservation area is provided corresponding to the special fluctuation reservation area of the main controller 261. In other words, the sub-variation holding area includes a first sub-variation holding area corresponding to the upper start winning opening 33A, a second sub fluctuation holding area corresponding to the lower starting winning opening 33B, and one sub execution area. Each of the two sub-fluctuating reservation areas includes four reservation areas (first reservation area to fourth reservation area).

In each holding area, according to the reception history (reception order) of the holding control command and the winning history of the game ball included in the holding control command (whether it is based on which winning opening 33A or 33B is won, etc.), Information (such as jackpot determination information and jackpot type information) related to the variable display executed by the decorative symbol display device 42 is stored in chronological order. Thereby, the sub-control device 262 can grasp the number of pending changes and their contents.

If the command sent from the main control device 261 is a gaming state notification command (step S4104: NO, step S4110: YES), in step S4107, the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj included in the gaming state notification command ( (any one of "0" to "7") is read out and stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553. After that, this process ends.

If the command sent from the main controller 261 is a variable pattern command (step S4110: NO, step S4111: YES), it is time to start variable display on the decorative pattern display device 42, so start at step S4113. Setting processing is performed and the process moves to step S4114.

In the start setting process of step S4113, various settings related to the variable display performed on the decorative pattern display device 42 are performed.

In this start setting process, first, as in the case of the special fluctuation holding area of the main controller 261, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the sub-fluctuation holding area to the sub-execution area side is executed. Subsequently, the fluctuation time corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command is set in the fluctuation display timer. The variable display timer is a means for measuring the variable time (remaining time of variable display) in the decorative pattern display device 42, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of variable display.

In addition, in the start setting process, a variable display flag is turned on, which is taken into consideration when determining whether or not the decorative symbol display device 42 is displaying a variable display.

In this embodiment, based on the variation pattern information stored in the variation pattern command, a production pattern related to the variation display of decorative symbols is selected, and the display is stopped after the variation time has elapsed based on the hit type information (including "miss"). Determine the stopping symbols (combination of stopping symbols) to be executed. Information regarding the production pattern and stop symbols determined here is added to the sub-execution area of the sub-variation holding area. Note that the correspondence between variable time information and performance patterns and the correspondence between jackpot type information and stopped symbols are stored in the ROM 552 of the sub-control device 262 in the form of a table.

In addition, in the sub-control device 262, similarly to the main control device 261, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a "probable variable jackpot", a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a "normal jackpot", a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a "JUB jackpot" and a "small win" are generated. , the fluctuation pattern corresponding to "reach outside the front and back", the fluctuation pattern corresponding to "reach other than the front and back", and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to "completely off", respectively, the values of the game state judgment value Xj are "0" to " 7" A plurality of corresponding table groups are stored in consecutive numbers starting from a predetermined reference address.

That is, when determining the display mode on the decorative pattern display device 42, the sub-control device 262 selects a predetermined gaming state (gaming state determination) from among a plurality of table groups based on the gaming state determination value Xj included in the variable pattern command. The table corresponding to the values "0" to "7" of the value Xj is selected. At this time, specifying the address where the table to be selected is stored by adding the value of the gaming state determination value Xj to the reference address is the same as when selecting the above-mentioned variable pattern table.

If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a symbol command (step S4111: NO, step S4112: YES), symbol setting processing is performed in step S4116, and this processing ends.

In the symbol setting process of step S4116, the symbols stored in the counter buffer (see FIG. 37) of the RAM 553, which will be described later, are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the winning type information stored in the reservation area of the sub-variation reservation area. Set in the above sub-execution area as a stop symbol to be stopped and displayed.

More specifically, when "B1" is set in the symbol command, a combination of any one of the 1st, 3rd, 5th, 7th, and 9th symbols is determined as the stop symbol. On the other hand, when "B2" is set in the symbol command, the combination of any one of the zero, 2, 4, 6, and 8 symbols is determined as the stop symbol. Further, when "B3" is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the front and back out-of-reach symbol buffer is determined as the stop symbol. When "B4" is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the reach symbol buffer other than the front and back misses is determined as the stop symbol. When "B5" is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the completely missed symbol buffer is determined as the stop symbol. When “B6” is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols “3”, “4”, and “1” is stopped in accordance with the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas of the decorative symbol display device 42. Determine as.

Now, in step S4114, it is determined whether or not the value of the gaming state determination value Xj included in the variable pattern command matches the value of the gaming state determination value Xj stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553. Here, if both values match, the process ends.

On the other hand, if the two values are different, the status error flag is turned on in step S4115, and in step S4117, the value of the gaming status determination value Xj included in the newly received fluctuation pattern command is regarded as the appropriate value. , stores the value of the gaming state determination value Xj in the gaming state information storage area. After that, this process ends. If the two values are different by turning on the status error flag, this fact will be notified by the error display lamp 104 or the like. Of course, the error notification means is not limited to the error display lamp 104, and may be configured to notify the error using the decorative pattern display device 42, the speaker SP, or the like.

In recent years, gaming machines have a backup function in their main controllers, so even if the power is cut off due to a power outage, various data including the gaming mode (gaming state) at that time will be stored. Since the power can be maintained, even if the power is cut off during the high probability mode, the player can resume playing the game in the high probability mode when the power is restored.

However, by using the backup function described above, it becomes possible to set the gaming machines in the high probability mode from the beginning of business at the gaming hall, which is commonly called "morning." Such acts are carried out by the game hall in order to increase its ability to attract customers at the start of business, but there is a risk that the gambling spirit of the players may be turned into a prank. Various methods can be considered to set the above action, but one example is a method of not initializing and resetting a gaming machine whose gaming mode was the high probability mode at the end of business on the previous day. Furthermore, in a configuration such as the present embodiment, in which information regarding the gaming mode (gaming state determination value Xj) is transmitted from the main controller to the sub-control device by a return command or the like when the pachinko machine is powered on, etc. If the cable connector connecting the main controller and sub-control device is removed when the power is turned on, etc., the sub-control device will not be able to grasp the actual gaming mode set by the main controller, and will not be able to grasp the initial gaming mode. In other words, control related to the "normal mode" is performed.

In general gaming machines, when performing effects on a display effect means such as a liquid crystal display device, the display mode (for example, background color, etc.) is made different between the normal mode and the high probability mode, so that players, etc. This makes it easy to understand the current game mode.

Further, since the sub-control device that controls the liquid crystal display device and the like generally does not have a backup function, when the power is turned off, control related to the initial setting gaming mode ("normal mode") is performed.

Therefore, by utilizing this, it is possible to set the display mode of the liquid crystal display device to be in the normal mode even though the actual gaming mode set by the main controller is the high probability mode. In this case, the current gaming mode cannot be easily determined just by looking at the liquid crystal display device, etc., and it becomes substantially difficult to confirm this action through a predetermined investigation or the like.

In particular, in a gaming machine where a high probability mode that is superficially difficult to distinguish from the "normal mode" is set, such as the "latent probability variable state" of the present embodiment, the high probability mode is set such that the gaming hall starts operating due to the above action. If the game mode is set from time to time, it becomes impossible to determine the actual game mode from the display mode of the liquid crystal display device.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, the value of the gaming state determination value Xj included in the fluctuation pattern command and the value of the gaming state determination value Xj stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553 are different. If so, an error notification is made to that effect, and the value of the gaming state determination value Xj included in the newly received variation pattern command is stored in the gaming state information storage area. In other words, the sub-control device 262 can grasp the appropriate gaming mode at that time. As a result, even if an action such as the above-mentioned "Morning" is performed and the actual gaming mode set by the main controller 261 is the high probability mode, the performance mode in the sub-control device 262 will be changed to the mode in the normal mode. Even if the variation pattern command is received, it is notified that the game mode is different, and the performance mode corresponds to the gaming state determination value Xj included in the variation pattern command. As a result, actions such as the above-mentioned "morning" by game halls can be suppressed.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 36, after step S3903 or if a negative determination is made in step S3901, the process moves to step S3904, and it is determined whether the execution timing of the next normal process has arrived, that is, the start of the previous normal process. It is determined whether a predetermined time (1 msec in this example) has elapsed since then. If the predetermined time has already passed, the process moves to step S3905; on the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal process, the process moves to step S3912.

In step S3905, updating processing of various counters is executed. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 uses various types of counter information when displaying decorative patterns. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37, it is used to set the jackpot decorative symbol counter C5, the accessory production counter C8, and each losing symbol in the upper symbol display area, middle symbol display area, and lower symbol display area. Upper, middle, and lower missed symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are used.

The missing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured such that register values are added using the R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, the numerical values change randomly. The values of these counters are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 553 as appropriate.

The jackpot decorative symbol counter C5 is for determining the symbol (jackpot symbol) that is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 when there is a jackpot (“probable jackpot” or “normal jackpot”). In this embodiment, five odd-numbered symbols and five even-numbered symbols are set as jackpot symbols. Therefore, five counter values (0 to 4) are prepared as the jackpot decorative symbol counter C5. That is, the jackpot decorative symbol counter C5 is configured to be incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 4, and return to 0 after reaching the upper limit (ie, 4). When the symbol command sent from the main controller 261 is "B1" indicating a combination of odd jackpot symbols, the counter value is determined based on a table (not shown) (a table that associates counter values with decorative symbols). If is 0, it is "1" (lower number), if it is 1, it is "3" (lower number), if it is 2, it is "5" (lower number), and if it is 3, it is "7" (lower number). A combination of odd jackpot symbols is determined, such as "9" (double number) if the number is 4.

In addition, if the symbol command is "B2" indicating a combination of even jackpot symbols, based on a table (not shown) (a table that associates counter values and decorative symbols), for example, if the counter value is 0, it will be "0". If it is 1, it will be “2”, if it is 2, it will be “4”, if it is 3, it will be “6”, if it is 4, it will be “ A combination of even jackpot symbols is determined, such as ``8'' (double number).

The jackpot decorative symbol counter C5 is periodically updated in the counter update process of step S3905, and is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 at the timing when the sub-control device 262 receives the symbol command as described above. In this embodiment, the jackpot decorative symbol counter C5 is stored in the jackpot decorative symbol counter buffer of the RAM 553, but it is not stored in the buffer and the counter value is referenced at the timing when a symbol command is received. You can also do this.

The accessory performance counter C8 is for determining whether or not to perform an accessory performance (additional performance), which will be described later, and its type. As the accessory production counter C8, 300 counter values (0 to 299) are prepared. That is, the accessory production counter C8 is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 299, and return to 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 299).

The accessory performance counter C8 is periodically updated in the counter update process of step S3905, and stored in the accessory performance counter buffer of the RAM 553. Then, it is taken into account in the accessory performance setting process in step S3910, which will be described later.

The upper, middle, and lower losing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR determine the stopping symbols (combinations of losing symbols) in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas when the jackpot lottery results in a "losing" drawing. Since each column displays one of 10 decorative symbols, 10 counter values (0 to 9) are prepared for each column. The upper/missing symbol counter CL determines the stopping symbol in the upper symbol display area, the middle/missing symbol counter CM determines the stopping symbol in the middle symbol display area, and the lower/missing symbol counter CR determines the stopping symbol in the lower symbol display area. is determined.

In this embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the numerical values of the R register built into the CPU 551. That is, when updating each losing symbol counter CL, CM, CR, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and if the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 10 is subtracted and the current value is determined. Ru. The winning symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated so that their update times do not overlap, and the combination of these winning symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is stored in the RAM 553 as the front and rear out-of-reach symbol buffers, front and rear out-of-reach reach symbol buffers, and It is stored in one of the completely missed symbol buffers.

Here, the updating process of each losing symbol counter CL, CM, CR will be explained in detail. As shown in FIG. 38, in step S4001, it is determined whether it is time to update the top/miss symbol counter CL, and in step S4002, it is determined whether it is time to update the center/miss symbol counter CM. The upper, middle, and lower missed symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured to be updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, if the down/out symbol counter CR has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination will be made in step S4001. Further, if the top/miss symbol counter CL has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination is made in step S4002. If it is time to update the top/miss symbol counter CL (YES in step S4001), the process advances to step S4003, and the top/miss symbol counter CL is updated. If it is time to update the center/out symbol counter CM (YES in step S4002), the process advances to step S4004, and the center/out symbol counter CM is updated. Further, if it is time to update the down/out symbol counter CR (steps S4001 and S4002 are both NO), the process advances to step S4005, and the down/out symbol counter CR is updated. In updating the missing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in steps S4003 to S4005, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and if the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 10 is subtracted. , the calculation results are set as the current values of the losing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR.

According to the above update process of CL, CM, and CR, each of the upper, middle, and lower missed symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in one update process, and the update timing of each counter value overlaps. Never. As a result, one set of missed symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated every time the update process is executed three times.

After that, in step S4006, the combination of the updated missing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is the combination of reach symbols (the symbols in the upper symbol display area and the symbols in the lower symbol display area are the same, and the upper and lower symbol display areas The symbol in the middle symbol display area is different from the symbol in the middle symbol display area), and if it is a combination of reach symbols (YES in S4006), further in step S4007, it is determined that the symbol is out of reach. Determine whether it exists or not. If the missing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of front and back off reach (front and back off symbols) (S4007 is YES), the process advances to step S4008, and the combination of the missing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is stored in the RAM 553. It is stored in the reach symbol buffer before and after. If the missing symbol counters CL, CM, CR are a combination of reach (symbols other than front/back off) (symbols other than front/back off) (S4007 is NO), the process advances to step S4009, and the current off symbol counters CL, CM, CR are The combinations are stored in the ready-to-reach symbol buffer of RAM 553 except for the front and back.

In addition, if the combination is other than the reach symbol (S4006 is NO), the process advances to step S4010, and it is determined whether the combination of the losing symbol counters CL, CM, CR is a combination of losing symbols, and If it is a combination of symbols (perfectly missed symbols) (S4010 is YES), the process advances to step S4011, and the combination of the missing symbol counters CL, CM, CR at that time is stored in the completely missed symbol buffer of the RAM 553. Note that if both steps S4006 and S4010 are NO, the symbols are aligned on the top, middle, and bottom, that is, it corresponds to a combination of jackpot symbols. This process ends without being stored.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the chance pattern that is stopped and displayed in the case of "JUB jackpot" has one combination of decorative patterns ("3", "4", "1"), There is no need to use counter information for display.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 36, in step S3907, display setting processing for performing various displays on the decorative pattern display device 42 is performed. In the display setting process, a variable display setting process for performing a variable display of decorative patterns on the decorative pattern display device 42, a pending display setting process for performing a pending display, etc. are mainly performed.

First, the variable display setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 40, in step S4301, the setting status of the variable display flag is checked to determine whether or not the decorative symbol display device 42 is displaying a variable display. In detail, if the fluctuating display flag is set (on), it is considered to be fluctuating, and if the fluctuating flag is cleared (off), the fluctuating display is It is considered that the display is in a stopped state, which is a stopped state. As described above, the fluctuating display flag is turned on when the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern display device 42 is started (start setting process of step S4113), and when the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern display device 42 is stopped and displayed. (See step S4305).

If an affirmative determination is made here, that is, at the start of the fluctuation or if the fluctuation is in progress, the process advances to step S4302, and if a negative determination is made, the present process is directly terminated.

In step S4302, a variable display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the value of the display timer is decremented by 4 msec. For example, if the fluctuation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), "2500" is set for the fluctuation display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

Next, the process advances to step S4303, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, taking into consideration the value of the fluctuation display timer after the above-mentioned subtraction. At this time, when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the fluctuation display timer becomes "0", an affirmative determination is made in step S4303.

If a negative determination is made in step S4303, in step S4304, a variation execution process is performed to execute a variation display on the decorative pattern display device 42, and this process is ended.

In this variation execution process, various calculation processes such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and command output settings are performed based on various information stored in the execution area of the sub-variation reservation area of the RAM 553, for example. .

Thereby, the display control device 45 performs a drawing process in accordance with the command from the sub-control device 262, and starts variable display of the symbols on the decorative symbol display device 42. Once the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main controller 261, the value of the fluctuation display timer set in the start setting process of step S4113 is Until it reaches "0"), the variable display of symbols continues under the cooperation of the sub-control device 262 and the display control device 45.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4303, that is, if it is determined that the value of the variable display timer is "0", stop display settings for performing a stop display on the decorative pattern display device 42 are made in step S4305. and ends this process. In the stop display setting, the fluctuating display flag is canceled (turned off), and a stop command is set to instruct the display control device 45 to stop the fluctuating display on the decorative pattern display device 42.

In addition, in the variation execution process of step S4304, a performance mode switching setting process for performing the display mode on the decorative symbol display device 42 in a mode (performance mode) according to the type of gaming state is also performed.

The performance mode in this embodiment is a state in which a "normal mode" is not provided with a "high support mode" and a state in which a "high support mode" is provided, depending on the gaming state (value of the gaming state determination value Xj). ``Chance mode'', which has an unknown duration, and ``Until next time/high support mode'', and ``Gold mode'' which explicitly informs the player. It is set to switch between.

More specifically, when the value of the gaming state determination value Xj stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553 is "0", that is, when "low probability mode" and "low support mode" are assigned, The presentation mode in the decorative pattern display device 42 is set to "normal mode" (see FIG. 48).

In addition, when the value of the gaming state judgment value Since this is a "potential state", even in such a case, the production mode in the decorative pattern display device 42 is set to "normal mode" so that the state is no different from the "normal state" on the surface. .

When the value of the gaming state determination value Xj stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553 is "1", "2", "4", "5", or "7", that is, "20 times/high support mode" , "30 times/High support mode", "40 times/High support mode", "50 times/High support mode", "30 times/High support mode S", "Until next time/High support mode" non-announcement effects Alternatively, during the period of "support continuous performance" which will be described later, the performance mode in the decorative pattern display device 42 is set to "chance mode" (see FIG. 50).

When the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553 is "6", that is, when the "until next time/high support mode" is assigned (excluding the non-announcement production period), , the presentation mode in the decorative pattern display device 42 is set to "gold mode" (see FIG. 51).

Next, the hold display setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 41. First, in step S4501, the winning type information stored in the reservation first to fourth areas of the second sub-variation reservation area corresponding to the lower start prize opening 33B among the sub-variation reservation areas is the information corresponding to the small win (small win). (win information).

If a negative determination is made here, that is, if small hit information is not included, normal pending display update processing is performed in step S4502. As shown in FIG. 48, in the normal hold display, in the first hold display area W3a and the second hold display area W3b, hold images TA1 to TA1 corresponding to four hold areas (hold first to fourth hold areas), respectively. TA4, TB1 to TB4 are displayed. Normally, a "holding lamp image" imitating a circular holding lamp is displayed as each holding image TA1 to TA4, TB1 to TB4.

Then, in the normal hold display update process of step S4502, the display is updated to increase or decrease the number of hold images TA1 to TA4, TB1 to TB4 displayed in a lighting mode or a light out mode, according to an increase or decrease in the number of hold images in the sub-variable hold area. Processing will be carried out.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4501, that is, if small hit information is included in any of the reservation first to fourth areas of the second sub-variation reservation area, reservation display change processing is performed in step S4502. After that, this process ends.

By performing the pending display change process in step S4502, among the four pending images TB1 to TB4 displayed in the second pending display area W3b, the pending images TB1 to TB4 corresponding to the pending area containing the above-mentioned small winning information are One of them is replaced with the "star-shaped image" from the "holding lamp image" that is normally displayed on hold. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 53, the third pending image TB3 has been changed to a "star-shaped image".

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 36, in the lamp setting process of step S3908, the lighting pattern of lamps and electric decorations is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed on the decorative pattern display device 42.

In the audio setting process of step S3909, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed on the decorative pattern display device 42. Furthermore, if a command related to voice, such as a notification of an error occurrence, is transmitted from the main control device 261, settings for controlling these are also performed in step S3909.

In step S3910, accessory effect setting processing is executed. In the accessory performance setting process, various settings regarding the accessory performance using the performance accessory unit 761 are performed. Note that the accessory performance setting process is a process that is performed as an additional performance when the support continuous performance (roulette performance) is performed, which will be described later, and is executed only when the support continuous performance (roulette performance) is performed. It is processing. Details of the accessory effect setting process in step S3910 will be described later.

In step S3911, other processes such as control settings for customer waiting effects (for example, a demo screen display that is set to be displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed with no variable display on the decorative pattern display device 42) are performed. conduct.

In step 3912, external output processing is executed to transmit a control signal to each device based on the settings in steps S3905 to 3911 above. For example, a display command is sent to the display control device 45 when the decorative pattern display device 42 displays the decorative pattern in a variable manner. Furthermore, when performing the accessory performance, various control signals such as motor control signals are output to the performance accessory unit 761 and the like.

After the processes of steps S3905 to S3912, which are performed every 1 msec, have been executed, or if a negative determination is made in step S3904, the process moves to step S3913, and it is determined whether the RAM 553 stores power-off occurrence information or not. Determine whether Note that the power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 261.

If the power-off occurrence information is not stored, the process advances to step S3914, and it is determined whether the RAM 553 has been destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed, the process returns to step S3901 and normal processing is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed, the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3913 that the power-off occurrence information is stored, power-off processing is executed in step S3915. In the power-off processing, generation of interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. It also erases the memory of the power-off occurrence information. After executing the power-off process, the process loops infinitely.

Next, the display mode etc. on the display section 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 will be explained together with the flow of the game by the player.

In the normal state (when the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "0"), a variable display area W1 is set on the display section 42a of the decorative pattern display device 42, which is made up of three pattern display areas: upper, middle, and lower. (See Figure 48). Further, below the variable display area W1, an instruction display area W2 is set which instructs (recommends) the firing mode of the game ball to the player, and further below it shows the pending number of variable displays. A hold display area W3 is set.

The hold display area W3 is set corresponding to the sub-variable hold area. That is, the hold display area W3 is divided into a first hold display area W3a and a second hold display area W3b, corresponding to the first sub-change hold area and the second sub-change hold area. In each of the hold display areas W3a and W3b, hold images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4 corresponding to four hold areas (first hold area to fourth hold area) are displayed (see FIG. 48).

Holding images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4 are displayed in a non-lit state (see the shaded area) during normal times (when not on hold), and when a variable display is held in a predetermined holding area, the corresponding The pending images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4 corresponding to the pending area are switched to be displayed in a lighting mode (see the white portion).

In the example shown in FIG. 48, the first pending image TA1 and the second pending image TA2 in the first pending display area W3a are displayed in a lit mode, and the remaining pending images TA3, TA4, TB1 to TB4 are displayed in a non-lit mode. The condition is shown. That is, the fluctuation display is held in the reservation first area and the reservation second area of the first sub-variation reservation area, and the current number of reservations in the fluctuation display is "2" related to the upper start prize opening 33A. It is shown.

In the normal state, the instruction display area W2 is displayed with "← "Left-handed" is displayed. Accordingly, the player plays the game by "hitting to the left." The left side area of the variable display unit 35 constitutes the first area in this embodiment.

When "hitting to the left", most of the game balls are guided toward the upper starting prize opening 33A located on the lower side of the variable display unit 35 by the nails and the like. Among them, how many game balls will be won into the upper starting prize opening 33A.

In this embodiment, the through gate 34 that triggers the opening of the lower starting prize opening 33B (opening/closing accessory 37) flows down the right side area of the variable display unit 35, that is, the left side area of the variable display unit 35. Since the game ball is placed in a position that cannot be reached, if the player continues to "hit left", the opening/closing accessory 37 will not be opened and the game ball will enter the lower starting prize opening 33B. Never. The right side area of the variable display unit 35 constitutes the second area in this embodiment.

In other words, in the normal state, the game is set so that it is more advantageous to play the game by "hitting to the left".

When the game ball enters the upper starting prize opening 33A, in the variable display area W1 of the decorative pattern display device 42, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are variably displayed in each of the pattern display areas. In this embodiment, decorative patterns Z with numbers "1" to "9" are displayed. The various decorative patterns Z are scrolled and displayed periodically from right to left in ascending or descending numerical order, thereby forming a series of pattern rows.

In such a case, in the upper pattern display area, the various decorative patterns Z are displayed in descending order (in order of decreasing numbers), and in the middle and lower pattern display areas, the various decorative patterns Z are displayed in ascending order (in the order of decreasing numbers). displayed in increasing order). Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the variable display stops in the order of upper symbol display area → lower symbol display area → middle symbol display area, and decorative symbols Z are stopped and displayed in each symbol display area.

When a jackpot lottery is won based on the winning of a game ball to the upper starting winning hole 33A, a decorative pattern Z of a jackpot combination is stopped and displayed on a predetermined jackpot line after a reach state. In the normal state of this embodiment, the jackpot line is composed of left, middle, and right vertical lines and two diagonal lines (referred to as 5 lines). Therefore, when three decorative symbols Z of a jackpot combination are stopped and displayed in line on any of the five lines in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas, the occurrence of a jackpot condition is confirmed.

When a jackpot state occurs, the opening/closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is opened, and a game ball can be entered into the jackpot opening 32a, and a predetermined jackpot is displayed on the display section 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42. The performance begins. Here, the number of jackpot rounds may be displayed.

However, in this embodiment, since the variable prize winning device 32 is arranged in the right side area of the variable display unit 35 (a position where the game balls flowing down the left side area of the variable display unit 35 cannot reach), If the player continues to "hit left-handed", the game ball cannot be won into the variable winning device 32. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 49, when the jackpot effect is started, the instruction display area W2 displays an action in which the player fires a game ball toward the right side area of the variable display unit 35 (such action will be described below). , "Right-handed hit") is displayed as "Right-handed hit →". Accordingly, the player plays a jackpot game by switching from "hitting left" to "hitting right" so that the game ball passes above the variable display unit 35 and heads toward the right side area of the variable display unit 35. .

In the case of "hitting to the right" here, most of the game balls will be guided toward the variable winning device 32 by the nails and the like, and will be won into the variable winning device 32. This allows the player to acquire more game balls.

On the other hand, game balls that do not win into the variable winning device 32 and pass through the variable winning device 32 will flow down toward the upper starting winning hole 33A and the lower starting winning hole 33B by the nails and the like.

In addition, in the right side area of the variable display device unit 35, a through gate 34 is provided which triggers the opening of the lower starting prize opening 33B (opening/closing accessory 37) on the way down to the variable winning device 32. The game ball passes through the through gate 34.

Here, if the game ball passes through the through gate 34 and wins the open lottery, the opening/closing accessory 37 will be in the open state, and the game ball will not be able to win into the lower starting prize opening 33B. It becomes possible.

After the jackpot ends, the winnings related to the opening/closing accessory 37 will be displayed for a predetermined number of times on the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative pattern display device 42), or until the next jackpot condition occurs. "High support mode" is given as a support mode.

Accordingly, on the display section 42a of the decorative pattern display device 42, a predetermined support performance ("chance mode" performance or "gold mode" performance) related to the "high support mode" is performed, and the variable display area W1 is Displayed in a reduced size. In the reduced variable display area W1, the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas are switched to the left, middle, and right symbol display areas, and the jackpot line becomes one line.

Further, during this support performance, a support number display area W4 is set on the display section 42a of the decorative pattern display device 42 (see FIGS. 50 and 51). The support count display area W4 apparently displays the support count that has been confirmed to be provided. Therefore, for example, even if it is confirmed that the number of support will be given "50 times" in the internal lottery, "20 times" is initially displayed for presentation purposes.

More specifically, if you win "16R normal jackpot B" or "4R normal jackpot B" and win "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode" or When the "50 times/high support mode" is granted, that is, when the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "1", "20 times" is initially displayed in the support number display area W4. Then, each time the variable display is performed, the value is subtracted by 1 and displayed.

Similarly, if you win "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "4R Probable Variable Jackpot B", you can win "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode" or "50 times high support mode". - Even when the "high support mode" is provided, that is, when the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "4", "20 times" is initially displayed in the support number display area W4. Then, each time the variable display is performed, the value is subtracted by 1 and displayed.

On the other hand, if "16R normal jackpot A" or "4R normal jackpot A" is won and "30 times/high support mode S" is awarded, that is, the value of gaming state judgment value Xj is "2" or "5". In the case of (excluding Xj=“5” in the case of non-notification effect), “30 times” is initially displayed in the support number display area W4. Then, each time the variable display is performed, the value is subtracted by 1 and displayed.

In addition, if you win "16R Probable Variable Jackpot A", "4R Probable Variable Jackpot A" or "JUB Jackpot" and are granted "Until next time/high support mode", that is, the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj is " 6", "until next time" is displayed in the support count display area W4 from the beginning. However, when the above-mentioned non-notification effect is performed, "30 times" is initially displayed in the support number display area W4. Then, each time the variable display is performed, the value is subtracted by 1 and displayed.

As mentioned above, while the "high support mode" is provided, the game ball will be in a state where it is easy to win into the lower start winning hole 33B, so even if the jackpot game ends, the player can not open or close the winning combination. In order to obtain an opportunity to release the object 37, it is preferable to continue "hitting to the right". In other words, during the "high support mode", the game is set so that it is more advantageous to play the game by "hitting to the right". Therefore, in the instruction display area W2 of the decorative symbol display device 42 during the "high support mode", "Right hit →" is displayed to recommend "Right hit" to the player.

In this embodiment, when the normal number of times changes in the "high support mode" (when the number of times displayed in the support number display area W4 does not show the end value "1 time"), that is, the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj The fluctuation time when is "1", "2", "4", and "5" is set to "1 second" by the fluctuation pattern table selected based on each gaming state judgment value Xj (at the time of jackpot except for). Then, on the display unit 42a of the decorative pattern display device 42 during the support performance, a display performance in accordance with this is determined by the sub-control device 262 and executed.

Also, when the "high support mode" changes a specific number of times (when the number of times displayed in the support number display area W4 is the ending value "1 time", that is, the "20th time" or "30th time" after the end of the jackpot) , the "40th" or "50th" variation time), that is, the variation time when the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "7" is selected based on the value "7" of the gaming state determination value Xj. It is set to "25 seconds" according to the fluctuation pattern table (excluding when there is a jackpot). Then, on the display unit 42a of the decorative pattern display device 42 during the support performance, a display performance in accordance with this is determined by the sub-control device 262 and executed.

On the display section 42a of the decorative pattern display device 42 during the above-mentioned specific times fluctuation (25 seconds fluctuation), a support continuation effect that excites the player's interest, such as deciding whether or not to continue the "high support mode" by lottery, is displayed. will be carried out.

For example, in this embodiment, a roulette effect is performed as the display effect (support continuation effect) at the time of the above-mentioned specific times variation. In the roulette effect, a roulette symbol TR is displayed as shown in FIG. The roulette symbol TR includes "end" indicating that the number of supports ends here, "+10 times" indicating that 10 more times will be added to the number of supports, and "next time" indicating that the number of supports will continue until the next jackpot. Items such as "until" are listed.

In the roulette effect, the roulette symbol TR rotates and the subsequent gaming state is determined by the item that stops at the position indicated by the arrow TY.

Here, the item to stop at depends on the number of grants of "high support mode" determined at the time of jackpot lottery ("20 times", "30 times", "40 times", "50 times") or "until next time". ”) and the number of support grants at that time (the value of the support number counter). The determined item is then displayed in the support count display area W4.

For example, if you win "16R normal jackpot B" with "50 times/high support mode" and after initially displaying "20 times" in the support number display area W4, if you reach the roulette effect, the upper limit is not "until next time" and there are "30" remaining support grants, so the item "+10 times" is selected.

Also, for example, if you win "4R normal jackpot A" with "30 times/high support mode" and after "30 times" is initially displayed in the support number display area W4, the roulette effect is reached, Since the upper limit is not "until next time" and there are no more support grants left, the "End" item is selected.

Also, for example, if you win "16R Probable Jackpot A" with "Until Next Time/High Support Mode", a non-announcement effect is performed (the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj becomes "5"), and the number of support display area W4 is displayed. When the roulette effect is reached after "30 times" is initially displayed, the upper limit is "until next time", so the item "until next time" is selected.

Now, when the "high support mode" ends and returns to the "low support mode", the display mode on the display section 42a of the decorative pattern display device 42 returns to the same state as the normal state (see FIG. 48). Therefore, "←Left hit" is displayed in the instruction display area W2 of the display section 42a.

However, in this embodiment, if a small hit is won during the "high support mode" and the small win information is stored in any of the holding areas of the second sub-variation holding areas related to the lower starting prize opening 33B, , among the pending images TB1 to TB4 displayed in the second pending display area W3b, the display mode of the pending images TB1 to TB4 corresponding to the pending area storing the small winning information is changed to an image in a mode different from the normal mode. (See FIG. 53). In the example shown in FIG. 53, the third pending image TB3 has been changed to a "star-shaped image". In this embodiment, along with this, "Right hit →" is displayed in the instruction display area W2.

Therefore, even if the "high support mode" ends and returns to the "low support mode", if small win information is stored in the hold area, the above display will be displayed and the player will receive a small win. This suggests that this will occur.

As mentioned above, the opening time of the variable winning device 32 in the small winning state is extremely short, so if you switch from the “left hitting” state to “right hitting” after the small winning occurs, it will not be in time, and the variable winning device 32 will not open in time. In order to win the game ball to 32, it is necessary to hit it "right-handed" in advance. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the small win suggestion allows the player to understand that a small win will occur, so he can prepare in advance and miss out on a small win.

As described above, when the support continuation performance (roulette performance) is performed, an accessory performance using the performance accessory unit 761 may be performed as an additional performance.

The accessory performance using the performance accessory unit 761 will be explained in detail below. First, the structure and control of the rotating body drive motor 817 that drives the rotating body 820 of the performance accessory unit 761 will be explained in detail. FIG. 54 is a schematic diagram for explaining the operating principle of the rotating body drive motor 817.

In this embodiment, a hybrid (HB) type two-phase stepping motor employing a 1-2 phase excitation method is used as the rotating body drive motor 817. Note that the stepping motor is not limited to a hybrid type or two-phase stepping motor, and various stepping motors such as a four-phase or five-phase stepping motor can be used.

The hybrid rotating body drive motor 817 includes a rotor 900 placed at the center and first to fourth poles 901 to 904 placed around the rotor 900.

The rotor 900 is composed of a front rotor 900a magnetized to N pole and a back rotor 900b magnetized to S pole. Between the teeth provided around the front rotor 900a, The rear rotor 900b is attached to the rotating shaft in such a manner that the teeth provided around the rear rotor 900b are relatively shifted by 1/2 pitch. A cylindrical magnet (not shown) is attached between the front rotor 900a and the rear rotor 900b.

As shown in FIG. 55, an excitation coil L1 and an excitation coil L3 are bifilar-wound around the first pole 901 and the third pole 903, and the winding end of the excitation coil L1 and the winding start end of the excitation coil L3 are connected, A DC current of +12V is applied here.

Similarly, the excitation coil L2 and the excitation coil L4 are bifilar-wound around the second pole 902 and the fourth pole 904, and the winding end of the excitation coil L2 and the winding start end of the excitation coil L4 are connected, and the above-mentioned DC is connected here. A current of +12V is applied.

Here, an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L1 of the first pole 901, and the phase in which the first pole 901 is excited to the S pole and the third pole 903 is excited to the N pole is defined as the A phase. The phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L3 of the third pole 903 to excite the first pole 901 to the north pole and the third pole 903 to the south pole is referred to as an inverse A phase.

Similarly, an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L2 of the second pole 902, and the phase in which the second pole 902 is excited to the S pole and the fourth pole 904 is excited to the N pole is defined as the B phase. The phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L4 of the fourth pole 904 to excite the second pole 902 to the north pole and the fourth pole 904 to the south pole is referred to as a reverse B phase.

Under such a configuration, if the rotating body drive motor 817 were to be driven by one-phase excitation, the rotor would be 900 can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise.

For example, when the A phase is first energized, the protrusion of the first pole 901, which has become an S pole, and the teeth of the front rotor 900a, and the protrusion of the third pole 903, which has become an N pole, and the teeth of the rear rotor 900b are attracted, respectively. When the B-phase is energized, the protrusion of the second pole 902 becomes the S pole and the teeth of the front rotor 900a, and the protrusion of the fourth pole 904 becomes the N pole and the teeth of the back rotor 900b. are facing each other by attraction force, and then when electricity is applied to the reverse A phase, the protrusion of the first pole 901 which has become the N pole and the teeth of the rear rotor 900b, and the protrusion of the third pole 903 which has become the S pole and the front rotor The teeth of the second pole 900a face each other due to the attraction force, and then when the reverse B phase is energized, the protrusion of the second pole 902 becomes the N pole, the teeth of the back rotor 900b, and the protrusion of the fourth pole 904 becomes the S pole. and the teeth of the front rotor 900a face each other due to suction force. By energizing in this order, the rotor 900 rotates clockwise in FIG. 54.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, 1-2 phase excitation drive is adopted in which 1-phase excitation and 2-phase excitation are alternately performed. In the 1-2 phase excitation drive, excitation is performed according to the following excitation sequences (1) to (8).

In other words, excitation of only one set is 1-phase excitation, and excitation of 2 phases at the same time is 2-phase excitation, so as shown in FIG. (1-phase excitation), (2) energize both A-phase and B-phase (2-phase excitation), and so on (3) energize B-phase, (4) both B-phase and reverse A-phase. energize, (5) energize the reverse A phase, (6) energize both the reverse A phase and reverse B phase, (7) energize the reverse B phase, (8) both the reverse B phase and A phase. This is a driving method in which the current is applied to the terminal, and then the process returns to (1).

With this configuration, in this embodiment, as described above, the rotating body drive motor 817 (rotating body 820) is configured to rotate once with a 360-pulse excitation signal (drive pulse signal). In other words, the angle change (angle change per step) based on one pulse of excitation signal is 1°. Further, in this embodiment, since the timer interrupt is set to 2 msec, the rotating body drive motor 817 (rotating body 820) rotates once in 720 msec (=2 msec x 360 pulses).

Application of an excitation signal to the rotating body drive motor 817 is performed via a motor driver 825 provided in the performance accessory unit 761. Excitation signal control data (hereinafter simply referred to as "excitation control data") as shown in FIG. 57 is output from the sub-control device 262 to the motor driver 825. This excitation control data is tabulated in accordance with a predetermined excitation order and stored in the ROM 552 of the sub-control device 262 as an excitation table. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sub-control device 262 constitutes a motor control means.

Then, appropriate excitation control data is output to the input/output port 554 in normal processing (other processing in step S3911) which is a timer interrupt processing periodically activated in the sub-control device 262. The excitation control data determines the excitation phase for the rotating body drive motor 817, and an excitation signal is applied to the excitation phase.

As shown in FIG. 56, the operating state of the rotating body drive motor 817 in this embodiment is an acceleration state (acceleration period) Ta from the start of rotation to constant rotation, and a constant rotation speed. It is divided into a continuous constant speed rotation state (constant speed rotation period) Tb and a deceleration state (deceleration period) Tc from the constant speed rotation state to rotation stop.

Here, it is desirable that the rotating body drive motor 817 transition from the accelerated state to the constant speed rotation state as soon as possible. In order to do this, it is only necessary to hasten the interrupt to the excitation phase of the rotating body drive motor 817 (switching from 1-phase excitation to 2-phase excitation, and switching from 2-phase excitation to 1-phase excitation). .

However, if the above-mentioned excitation order is out of order at the start of rotation, that is, initial excitation, or the excitation intervals are short, or the excitation intervals are extremely uneven, it may cause step-out or unstable rotation. There is a risk. Here, the excitation interval is the interval at which data is written to the output buffer at the input/output port 554, and means the interval at which excitation control data is output from the output buffer at the input/output port 554.

Therefore, it is necessary to perform optimal interrupt processing within a range that does not involve such concerns. In other words, in this embodiment in which an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil by interrupt processing, it is necessary to set an appropriate interrupt timing for the excitation phase. For this reason, first, the excitation state is fixed by the same excitation phase until the rotational shaking of the rotor 900 is suppressed during motor acceleration.

Basically, it should be considered that unless the state of initial excitation (excitation when the initial speed is zero) is maintained to some extent, it is difficult to eliminate synchronization and rotational instability. This is related to the degree of convergence of the rotational vibration (minor vibration accompanied by reciprocating motion) of the rotor 900 that occurs when the teeth of the rotor 900 are attracted to the protrusions of the poles 901 to 904 during initial excitation.

In order to perform acceleration processing while eliminating rotational fluctuations, a time of at least about 200 to 250 msec after initial excitation is required to fix the same excitation phase. Therefore, it is sufficient to set a time exceeding this time as the initial excitation holding period for fixing the initial excitation phase.

In this embodiment, since the timer interrupt is set to 2 msec, the initial excitation holding period is set to 260 msec (=2 msec x 130 interrupts). During the initial excitation holding period, excitation control data shown in FIG. 57 (for example, excitation control data 09H shown in excitation order 2) is continuously output from the input/output port 554 to the motor driver 825.

For example, as shown in FIG. 58, in the acceleration period Ta, if the acceleration period during which initial excitation is performed is the first acceleration period, and the subsequent acceleration period until constant speed rotation is the second acceleration period, then During the second acceleration period, interrupt processing for the excitation phase of the excitation signal is frequently performed in order to reach constant speed rotation.

Here, the problem is whether the excitation phase of the initial excitation is one-phase excitation or two-phase excitation. The initial excitation requires high torque to rotate the rotor 900, and the excitation phase of the initial excitation is preferably two-phase excitation, which provides even higher torque than one-phase excitation. This is due to the reasons shown below.

First, in a hybrid (HB) type two-phase stepping motor that employs a 1-2 phase excitation method as a stepping motor, two-phase excitation can be considered as the initial excitation phase during acceleration in addition to one-phase excitation.

One-phase excitation drives only a specific excitation phase, and rotational torque at the initial speed is obtained by this one-phase excitation. On the other hand, in two-phase excitation, two specific excitation phases are simultaneously driven, and rotational torque at the initial speed is obtained by two-phase excitation. Although it differs depending on the size of the rotating body 820, if it is a normal game machine, it is possible to accelerate the rotating body 820 from an initial speed of zero even with one-phase excitation.

However, in the case of one-phase excitation, the rotational torque generated is smaller than that in two-phase excitation, so there is a possibility that a sufficient initial velocity cannot be obtained. If sufficient initial velocity is not obtained, there is a high possibility of step-out, so two-phase excitation is preferable for initial excitation.

Further, when stopping the rotating body 820, the rotating body 820 slides by a predetermined step angle and then stops after applying the brake (braking) to the rotating body 820 until it actually stops. When it slips and stops, it is necessary to perform the next acceleration process while absorbing this angular deviation, and it is preferable that the electromagnetic attraction force at the initial excitation be as large as possible.

In the case of two-phase excitation, the electromagnetic attractive force is greater than that in one-phase excitation, so rotational fluctuations caused by this angle deviation can be quickly absorbed. Taking all of the above into consideration, two-phase excitation is preferable to one-phase excitation for initial excitation.

When the initial excitation is set to two-phase excitation, the timing example shown in FIG. 58 is suitable as the interrupt timing for reaching the predetermined rotational speed in a short period of time within the second acceleration period.

Furthermore, for the two-phase excitation as the initial excitation, the earliest excitation order 2 can be selected from among the excitation orders shown in FIG. Of course, depending on the excitation phase when the rotation is stopped, the excitation order may be different (excitation order 4, excitation order 6, or excitation order 8). After the excitation signal is applied in synchronization with the interrupt timing every 2 msec, this excitation state is maintained for 130 interrupts (260 msec).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 58, in the second acceleration period, 1-2 phase excitation is repeated alternately, but the holding period of each excitation phase (interrupt timing to the excitation phase) is the same as the excitation holding period of 1-phase excitation. The excitation holding period of two-phase excitation is controlled to be finely switched.

In the example shown in FIG. 58, when entering the second acceleration period, the 1-phase excitation following the 2-phase excitation is performed for 8 interrupts, and the next 2-phase excitation is performed for 7 interrupts, and so on. The excitation time is set to be shorter and the excitation time is gradually shortened, and the excitation time is finally set to normal 1-2 phase excitation in which the excitation phases are sequentially switched at the minimum interrupt interval.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 58, when the last excitation phase in the second acceleration period is two-phase excitation and this is one interrupt, the first excitation phase in the next constant speed rotation period is one-phase excitation. The interrupt interval is one interrupt. In this way, by sequentially shortening the interrupt timing during the second acceleration period as it approaches constant speed rotation, high-speed acceleration processing can be achieved in a short time, and a smooth transition to constant speed rotation can be achieved. It becomes possible.

Note that the second acceleration period shown in FIG. 58 is an example when the entire acceleration period Ta is set to 426 msec, and if the entire acceleration period Ta is set to a different time, It goes without saying that the second acceleration period is selected depending on the time and that an interrupt process different from that in FIG. 58 is performed.

Now, returning to the explanation regarding the drive characteristics of the rotating body drive motor 817, when performing a brake process to stop the rotating body 820, four-phase excitation is performed immediately after two-phase excitation is performed. When braking is performed using only two-phase excitation, there is a possibility that the strong braking force will cause the rotational speed to drop rapidly and the rotation to be out of order.

On the other hand, by performing four-phase excitation immediately after two-phase excitation, it is possible to smoothly stop the rotating body 820 without disrupting the rotation. Furthermore, since it is easier to specify the rotational position during two-phase excitation than during one-phase excitation, it is also possible to improve the stopping position accuracy by performing four-phase excitation immediately after two-phase excitation.

As described above, the excitation signal is applied to the rotating body drive motor 817 by sequentially outputting excitation control data to the motor driver 825 in accordance with the excitation order of the excitation table stored in the ROM 552 (see FIG. 57). ).

More specifically, the excitation control data stored in the excitation table of the ROM 552 is sequentially read from the excitation table every time a timer interrupt occurs, and written to the output buffer of the input/output port 554. The excitation control data written in the output buffer of the input/output port 554 is immediately output to the motor driver 825, and the motor driver 825 executes the process of energizing the corresponding excitation coils L1 to L4.

Here, motor control processing related to the rotating body drive motor 817 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 59. Such motor control processing is performed in other processing (step S3911) within the normal processing.

Note that when executing such motor control processing, at least a wait timer, an acceleration counter, and an excitation order pointer are set in the RAM 553.

The number of timer interrupts (excitation time) in the same excitation mode is set in the wait timer. An example is shown in FIG. In the first acceleration period, the two-phase excitation mode (acceleration order 1) is continuously executed for 130 units (130 interrupts). Therefore, the wait timer is set to "130". Similarly, in the second acceleration period, for example, in acceleration order 2, the one-phase excitation mode is continuously executed for eight units (eight interrupts), so the wait timer is set to "8".

The acceleration counter is used to specify the acceleration order as shown in FIG. The acceleration process in this embodiment consists of a 25-step excitation pattern (acceleration order 1 to 25). Each data shown in FIG. 58 is saved in the ROM 552 in the form of a table.

The excitation order pointer is a pointer used when determining the excitation phase for the rotating body drive motor 817, as shown in FIG. When the rotating body drive motor 817 with 1-2 phase excitation is used, 1-phase excitation and 2-phase excitation are performed alternately, and the phase excitation patterns at that time are 8 patterns as shown in FIG. The value (0 to 7) of this excitation order pointer specifies which phase excitation pattern and which excitation control data is acquired as output excitation control data and temporarily stored in the RAM 553.

Although details will be described later, the value of the excitation order pointer at the start of rotation differs depending on which pattern the excitation phase used when the rotating body drive motor 817 was stopped immediately before was used. During rotation, the value of the excitation order pointer is updated sequentially.

First, the flow of motor control processing from before the rotation of the rotating body 820 to the start of rotation will be described.

As shown in FIG. 59, in the motor control process, first in step S5101 it is determined whether the value of the wait timer is "0". Here, since the value of the wait timer before the rotation of the rotating body 820 starts is "0", an affirmative determination is made in the determination process of step S5101 before the rotation of the rotating body 820 starts, and the process proceeds to step S5111. .

In step S5111, it is determined whether the value of the acceleration counter is not "0". Here, since the value of the acceleration counter before the rotation of the rotating body 820 starts is "0", a negative determination is made in the determination process of step S5111 before the rotation of the rotating body 820 starts, and the process proceeds to step S5112. .

In step S5112, the output excitation control data is set to "0" and the process ends. As a result, the rotating body drive motor 817 remains in a stopped state until a predetermined rotation start condition is satisfied due to the operation of the effect button 125 as described later.

It should be noted that a determination as to whether or not rotation start conditions are satisfied, such as whether or not the effect button 125 has been operated, is performed in the accessory effect setting process of step S3910. Here, if it is determined that the predetermined rotation start condition is satisfied, the value of the acceleration counter is set to "25" in the accessory drive setting process of step S6016, which will be described later.

Initially, when the rotation start condition is satisfied, the value of the wait timer is still "0", so in this case as well, the process proceeds to step S5111 via step S5101, and the value of the acceleration counter is determined. However, since the value of the acceleration counter is set to "25" at this stage, the process advances to step S5121 in this case. Then, in step S5121, the value of the acceleration counter is subtracted by 1.

In the following step S5122, it is determined again whether the value of the acceleration counter is not "0". Since the value of the acceleration counter at this time is "24", the process advances to step S5131.

In step S5131, the contents of the excitation time at the acceleration counter value "24" are referred to from the table shown in FIG. 58, and the excitation time is set in the wait timer. Here, "130" is set as the excitation time.

When the process of setting the wait timer is completed, an update process of adding 1 to the excitation order pointer is executed in step S5132. Then, in step S5133, excitation control data (for example, "06H") corresponding to the updated value of the excitation order pointer (for example, "5") is acquired from the table shown in FIG. 57, and the excitation control data is used for output excitation control. It is saved in the RAM 553 as data. The stored excitation control data is output to the input/output port 554 at a predetermined timing (external output processing in step S3912).

Here, since the output to the input/output port 554 is data writing processing to the output buffer of the input/output port 554, the motor driver 825 is excited at the same time as the excitation control data is written to the input/output port 554. This means that control data has been output. As a result, the motor driver 825 immediately performs the process of energizing the excitation phase specified by the excitation control data, and the excitation process for the rotor 900 of the rotating body drive motor 817 is performed.

In other words, when the predetermined rotation start condition is satisfied and the counter value "25" is set in the acceleration counter, the output of excitation control data to the motor driver 825 is started, and the rotor 900 of the rotating body drive motor 817 is started. Start. Then, in the next timer interrupt process (normal process), the motor control process will be executed again.

Here, the flow of the motor control process after the rotating body 820 starts rotating will be described. In this case, since the value of the wait timer is "130", the process advances to step S5102, where a subtraction process is performed to subtract 1 from the value of the wait timer, and this process ends. As a result, the values of the acceleration counter and the excitation order pointer maintain the same values as at the time of the previous timer interrupt. In other words, the motor acceleration process using the same excitation phase (two-phase excitation in this example) is continued. This motor acceleration process using the same excitation phase is performed continuously for a total of 130 interrupts, and the wait timer is decremented every time the timer interrupt occurs. As a result, the value of the wait timer becomes "0" when the 130 interrupt ends.

On the other hand, the value of the acceleration counter does not change at all during this first acceleration period. When the 130 interrupt ends and the value of the wait timer becomes "0", the process advances to step S5121 via step S5111, and the acceleration counter is subtracted.

After that, in steps S5122 and S5131, the excitation time (8 interrupts) corresponding to the value "23" of the acceleration counter subtracted by 1 is obtained from the table in FIG. 58, and the value "8" of this excitation time is set in the wait timer. do.

In steps S5132 and S5133, the value of the excitation order pointer is added by 1 to "6", and the excitation control data "02H" (1-phase excitation) corresponding to the value "6" of this excitation order pointer is set as the output excitation control data. Store in RAM 553.

Thereafter, when the output excitation control data acquisition processing is completed, the output excitation control data is output to the input/output port 554, and processing related to the second acceleration period is started. Therefore, at the beginning of the second acceleration period, one-phase excitation is performed continuously for eight interruptions.

The beginning of the second acceleration period is the process corresponding to acceleration order 2 (see FIG. 58). When eight timer interrupts are completed in the acceleration processing in acceleration order 2 and an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, the value of the acceleration counter is further subtracted by 1 in step S5121.

As a result, the value of the excitation order pointer becomes "7", the corresponding excitation control data "03H" is read from the table in FIG. It will be carried out.

Since the acceleration process during the second acceleration period is executed while sequentially decrementing the acceleration counter in this way, the value of the acceleration counter eventually becomes "0". If the value of the acceleration counter becomes "0" as a result of the subtraction process in step S5121, a negative determination is made in step S5122, and the process proceeds to step S5123. In step S5123, the value of the acceleration counter is set to "1".

Thereafter, the process advances to step S5131, and a value corresponding to the excitation time corresponding to the value "0" of the acceleration counter when subtracted in step S5121 is set in the wait timer. After that, in steps S5132 and S5133, the excitation order pointer is updated, and the excitation control data corresponding to this pointer (in this example, excitation control data "01H" corresponding to the "0" pointer) is read from the table in FIG. , and set this as output excitation control data. Therefore, when the value of the acceleration counter becomes "0" in step S5121, excitation is performed for one timer interrupt.

Even if the value of the acceleration counter becomes "0" in step S5121, the value of the acceleration counter becomes "1" in the process of step S5123. Therefore, in the next timer interrupt process, in the next process step of acceleration order 25 (see FIG. 58), which is the excitation order, the process proceeds to step S5121 via step S5111, and the acceleration counter subtraction process is performed again. Become.

As a result, the value of the acceleration counter becomes "0" again, so in step S5131, the excitation time corresponding to acceleration order 25 in FIG. 58 is set again in the wait timer. Furthermore, as a result of the excitation order pointer being updated to "1" in the process of step S5132, the excitation phase is switched to two-phase excitation.

That is, from the next timer interrupt processing in acceleration order 25, the value of the acceleration counter is alternately switched to "0" or "1" in steps S5121 and S5123, and the value of the acceleration counter is always set to "0" in step S5131. The excitation time will be set in the wait timer.

Furthermore, since the excitation control data is updated each time in steps S5132 and S5133, the rotating body drive motor 817 enters a rotating state in which one-phase excitation and two-phase excitation are alternately repeated. This is nothing but a constant speed process, and in other words, when the excitation process progresses to acceleration order 25, the state shifts to a constant speed rotation state thereafter.

Thereafter, until a predetermined rotation stop condition is satisfied, such as the end time of operation process data, which will be described later, the rotating body drive motor 817 is operated at a constant speed while grasping the rotational position (rotational angular position) of the rotating body 820. It will be maintained in a rotating state.

Here, the flow of processing for determining the rotational position of the rotating body 820 will be explained in detail. When the excitation control data is acquired in step S5133, the value of the decoration area offset, which will be described later, is updated in step S5134, and the origin position detection process of the rotating body 820 is performed in step S5135.

However, this origin position detection process is performed after the rotating body 820 enters a constant speed rotation state. That is, in step S5135, it is first determined whether or not the rotating body 820 is in a constant speed rotation state, and if the rotating body 820 is in a constant speed rotation state, the origin position of the rotating body 820 is determined. It is confirmed whether the light shielding piece 818c has passed a predetermined detection position (position detection sensor 821).

If it is confirmed in step S5135 that the rotary body 820 is in a constant speed rotation state and that the rotary body 820 has passed the origin position, the process advances to step S5136, and a decoration area offset and a decoration area number update process are executed.

Specifically, at the timing when the origin position of the rotating body 820 passes a predetermined detection position, the values of the decorative area offset and the decorative area number are each reset to the value "0" corresponding to the origin position of the rotating body 820.

The “decoration area number” is a serial number assigned to correspond to the ten decoration areas E (E1 to E10) that partition the circular decoration portion 820b of the rotating body 820. In this embodiment, since ten decorative areas E (E1 to E10) are provided, the decorative area numbers take values from "0" to "9". For example, decoration area number "0" corresponds to the first decoration area E1, and decoration area number "9" corresponds to the tenth decoration area E10.

The "decoration area offset" is a value obtained by dividing one decoration area E into 36 equal parts in the rotational direction of the rotating body 820, and takes a value of [0] to "35". Note that this number "36" is the number of pulses required for one decorative area E to move by one section.

Then, in step S5141, the value of the decoration area offset is checked at any time, and when this value reaches "36", the process advances to step S5142, where the decoration area number is updated and the value of the decoration area offset is reset to "0".

While the acceleration processing and constant speed rotation processing are being performed normally in this way, the subsequent abnormality processing in steps S5143 to S5145 and the rotation stop processing (brake processing) in steps S5151 to S5154 are skipped, and this processing is continued. finish. Note that the details of these processes will be sequentially explained below.

First, the flow of the motor control process (rotation stop process) accompanying the rotation stop of the rotating body 820 will be explained.

As described above, when stopping the rotating body 820, even if a brake is applied to the rotating body 820, since the rotor 900 has slippage, the rotor 900 will slide three to four steps before stopping. Also, since it is preferable that the excitation phase when starting the motor is two-phase excitation, it is necessary to know when the motor will stop so that the brake will start immediately after two-phase excitation, that is, at the timing of one-phase excitation. be.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as a process after executing the decoration area number update process and the decoration area offset reset process in step S5142, a process step for determining when the rotating body 820 stops, such as in step S5151, is performed. I'm leaving it there.

In this step S5151, it is determined whether the excitation phase currently being output is two-phase excitation and whether the decorative area offset value is within a range that does not exceed a predetermined offset value. Here, whether the current excitation phase is two-phase excitation can be determined by referring to the value of the excitation order pointer, and whether or not the current excitation phase exceeds a predetermined offset value can be determined by referring to the decorative area offset value.

The reason why the decorative area offset value is taken into consideration is that the larger the decorative area offset value is, the larger the relative deviation of the stop position of the decorative area E becomes. Therefore, in this embodiment, the rotation stop process is executed when the deviation of the decorative area E cannot be clearly recognized and the decorative area offset value is 4 or less.

Therefore, if this offset condition is not satisfied, a negative determination is made in step S5151, and the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the predetermined rotation stop condition is satisfied and the offset condition is satisfied, the process moves to step S5152.

In step S5152, the current decoration area number is compared with the decoration area number of a predetermined decoration area E (for example, the first decoration area E1).

Here, if the two decorative area numbers do not match, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, when the decoration area numbers of both match, the process advances to step S5153 and brake setting processing is performed.

In this brake setting process, the acceleration counter is first reset to "0", and the brake excitation control data is set. In this embodiment, settings are made so that four phases are excited simultaneously.

Furthermore, the brake time is set in the wait timer. In this embodiment, 120 interrupts (=240 msec) is set as the brake time, and "120" is set in the wait timer.

When the wait timer is set to "120", the processing of steps S5101 and S5102 is performed for 120 interrupts, so the brake excitation control data is continuously output during that time. This causes rotor 900 to come to a complete stop.

When the brake setting process is completed, in step S5154, an adjustment process is performed on the excitation order pointer to be used at the start of the next rotation.

The excitation order pointer adjustment process takes into account the slippage of the rotor 900. As described above, when braking is performed, the rotor 900 almost always slips for about 3 to 4 steps before stopping. For example, if the brake is applied at the excitation order pointer "0" shown in FIG. It is estimated that the rotor 900 is stopped at the position of the excitation order pointer "4". Therefore, the excitation phase is adjusted by "four excitations". As a result, the updated excitation order pointer value in step S5132 becomes "5".

Finally, motor control processing when an abnormality occurs in the rotation of the rotating body 820 will be described.

As already explained, during the acceleration period, the value of the decoration area offset is updated according to the addition/subtraction of the acceleration counter, and during the constant speed rotation period, the value of the decoration area offset is updated every time a timer interrupt is performed. Then, when the value of the decoration area offset becomes "36", the decoration area number is updated and the value of the decoration area offset is reset. Furthermore, when the origin position of the rotating body 820 is detected, the decoration area number and the decoration area offset value are reset in accordance with the timing of passage of the origin position.

In the case of normal rotation in which the rotating body drive motor 817 accelerates normally and reaches constant speed rotation, the above-mentioned situation is reproduced. However, if the acceleration is not normal, the following abnormal rotation processing will occur.

First, as described above, the rotating body 820 rotates once by an excitation signal of 360 pulses. Therefore, if the rotating body 820 is rotating normally, when a 360-pulse excitation signal is output after the origin position (shading piece 818c) of the rotating body 820 passes the position detection sensor 821, passage of the origin position of the rotating body 820 is detected again. do.

However, if acceleration is not performed normally and the rotating body 820 does not start rotating, passage of the origin position of the rotating body 820 is not detected even if a 360-pulse excitation signal is output. As a result, the decoration area number is not reset in step S5136, so the decoration area number exceeds the maximum value "9" and is updated to "10" in step S5142. Even if the value of the decoration area number is "10", the counter addition/subtraction process will be performed in the next process, so the value of the decoration area offset will be updated as before.

In this case, after step S5141, the value of the decoration area number is checked in step S5143. Since the decoration area numbers range from "0" to "9", when the value reaches "10", it can be considered as an abnormal rotation state.

However, since there is a possibility that the cause of the abnormal rotation state is due to variations in the operation of the rotating body drive motor 817, it is determined in step S5144 whether the value of the decorative area offset has been updated by 4 offsets or more, and the value is updated. Only when this happens, it is determined that there is an abnormal rotation state, and the abnormality processing in step S5145 is performed.

In the abnormality processing, the acceleration counter is set to its initial value "25", and the acceleration processing is performed again from the next timer interrupt. Incidentally, the rotating body drive motor 817 has operational variations, and ideally one rotation = 360 pulses, but depending on the case, it may be possible to make one rotation with 359 pulses or 361 pulses. Therefore, in step S5144, four offsets are set as the abnormality detection value with a margin.

Furthermore, when the number of times of abnormality processing in this step S5145 exceeds the specified number of times (for example, three times), processing to notify this abnormal state (flashing processing to the abnormality lamp provided in the hall, buzzer notification to the hall manager) is performed. processing, etc.).

Next, the accessory effect setting process in step S3910 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 60 and 61.

First, in step S6001, it is determined whether or not the current variation is the execution time of the roulette performance (support continuous performance), taking into consideration the value of the gaming state determination value Xj.

Here, if a negative determination is made, that is, if it is not the time for the roulette performance to be performed, in step S6002, the value of the performance status flag JF, which will be described later, is reset to "0", and the process is immediately terminated.

The performance state flag JF is discrimination information for determining the performance state of the additional performance (mainly the performance using the performance accessory unit 761).

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6001, that is, if the current variation is the execution time of the roulette effect, the process moves to step S6003.

In step S6003, it is determined whether or not the additional performance is currently in the pre-start stage (JF=0), taking into account the value of the performance status flag JF. Here, if a negative determination is made, that is, if the additional effect has started (JF≧1), the process moves to step S6006.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6003, that is, if it is before the start of the additional effect, the process moves to step S6004.

In step S6004, based on the value of the accessory performance counter C8 stored in the accessory performance counter buffer of the RAM 553, performance determination processing is performed to determine whether or not to execute the performance performance and its type.

The correspondence between the value of the accessory performance counter C8 and whether or not the accessory performance is executed and its type is stored in the ROM 552 of the sub-control device 262 as an accessory performance pattern determination table.

In the present embodiment, in the roulette performance of the decorative pattern display device 42, a plurality of accessory performance pattern determination tables are set corresponding to the final display item of the roulette pattern TR that finally stops at the position indicated by the arrow TY. There is.

Specifically, "End" indicates that the number of supports ends here, "+10" indicates that 10 more times will be added to the number of supports, and "Until next time" indicates that the number of supports will continue until the next jackpot. Corresponding to the three confirmed display items, such as ``end'', role model performance pattern determination table, ``+10 times'', role model performance pattern determination table, and ``until next time'', role model performance pattern determination table. There are 3 tables available.

In each table, the rate at which various presentation patterns are selected differs depending on whether they correspond to "end", "+10 times", or "until next time". If the number of support is continued, or if it corresponds to "until next time", than in the case of "end", whether or not to execute the role performance, and furthermore, the development performance pattern described later. The various tables are configured to increase the rate at which this is done.

For example, when the final display item in the roulette performance is "end", the "end"/accessory performance pattern determination table as shown in FIG. 62(a) is referred to. In this case, when the value of the accessory performance counter C8 is C8=0 to 199, "no accessory performance" is selected, and no accessory performance is performed as an additional performance.

On the other hand, when the value of the accessory effect counter C8 is C8=200 to 299, "with accessory effect" is selected, and the accessory effect is executed as an additional effect. Among these, when C8=200 to 249, the "no development pattern" accessory production is executed, and when C8=250 to 279, the "first development pattern" accessory production is executed, and C8= In the case of C8=280 to 289, the accessory effect of the "second development pattern" is executed, and in the case of C8=290 to 299, the accessory effect of the "third development pattern" is executed. Note that the details of the accessory effects of these first to third development patterns will be described later.

Further, when the confirmed display item in the roulette performance is "until next time", the "until next time" time/accessory performance pattern determination table as shown in FIG. 62(b) is referred to. In this case, when the value of the accessory performance counter C8 is C8=0 to 9, "no accessory performance" is selected, and no accessory performance is performed as an additional performance.

On the other hand, when the value of the accessory effect counter C8 is C8=10 to 299, "with accessory effect" is selected, and the accessory effect is executed as an additional effect. Among these, when C8 = 10 to 99, the accessory production of the "no development pattern" is executed, and when C8 = 100 to 199, the accessory production of the "first development pattern" is executed, and C8 = In the case of C8=200 to 249, the accessory effect of the "second development pattern" is executed, and in the case of C8=250 to 299, the accessory effect of the "third development pattern" is executed.

Note that the specific contents of the "+10 times" character performance pattern determination table, which is referred to when the confirmed display item in the roulette performance is "+10 times", are omitted from illustration, but are similar to those mentioned above. A table with contents different from the ``'End'' time/Accessory effect performance pattern determination table'' and the ``'Until next time'' time/Accessory effect performance pattern determination table'' is set.

Here, when the above-mentioned "no accessory effect" is selected, the value of the accessory effect pattern flag PF is set to "0". The accessory performance pattern flag PF is discrimination information for determining the accessory performance pattern.

Similarly, when the "undeveloped pattern" accessory performance is selected, the value of the accessory performance pattern flag PF is set to "1". When the accessory performance of the "first development pattern" is selected, the value of the accessory performance pattern flag PF is set to "2". When the accessory performance of the "second development pattern" is selected, the value of the accessory performance pattern flag PF is set to "3". When the accessory performance of the "third development pattern" is selected, the value of the accessory performance pattern flag PF is set to "4".

Therefore, when performing the effect determination process in step S6004, the sub-control device 262 first selects a predetermined one from among the plurality of role object effect pattern determination table groups based on the information related to the confirmed display items in the roulette effect. An accessory performance pattern determination table corresponding to the confirmed display item is selected, and an accessory performance pattern is determined based on the selected table. At this time, the determined result is stored in a predetermined storage area within the RAM 553.

Then, in the subsequent step S6005, a start request setting process is performed, and then this process ends.

In the start request setting process of step S6005, the value of the performance state flag JF is set to "1" indicating that the start request period of the accessory performance is in progress, and the value of the operation effective timer ST is set to a predetermined value (main In the embodiment, it is set to 5 seconds).

Note that the operation valid timer ST is a timer for measuring the operation valid period of the effect button 125.

Furthermore, in this start request setting process, a display setting process for performing a start request display effect on the display section 42a of the decorative pattern display device 42 is performed.

By performing this display setting process, in addition to the roulette effect, characters such as "Please press the button" are displayed on the display section 42a of the decorative pattern display device 42, so that the player can see the effect button 125. A display effect prompting the user to operate is executed.

Now, in step S6006, which is proceeded to after a negative determination is made in step S6003, it is determined whether or not it is currently in the period for requesting the start of the accessory performance (JF=1), taking into account the value of the performance state flag JF. Discern. Here, if a negative determination is made, that is, if it is not within the period for requesting the start of the accessory performance (JF≧2), the process moves to step S6012.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6006, that is, if it is currently in the period for requesting the start of the accessory production, it is determined in step S6007 whether or not the value of the operation valid timer ST is "0". do.

Here, if the determination is affirmative, that is, if the value of the operation valid timer ST is "0", the player does not press the production button 125 during the period of requesting the start of the accessory production, and the operation validity period has passed, the process moves to step S6008.

In step S6008, the value of the performance state flag JF is set to "9", which means that the accessory performance will not progress any further, and the process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6007, that is, if the value of the operation valid timer ST is not "0", the process moves to step S6009.

In step S6009, taking into account the value of the button operation flag BF, it is determined whether or not the player pressed the performance button 125 (BF=1) during the period of requesting the start of the accessory performance (during the valid operation period). Discern.

The button operation flag BF is discrimination information for determining whether or not the production button 125 has been pressed during the operation validity period, and if the production button 125 has been pressed during the operation validity period, its value is "1". , and the value is maintained at "0" while no pressing operation is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S6009, that is, if the production button 125 is not pressed, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, that is, if the effect button 125 is pressed, effect pattern setting processing is performed in step S6010.

In the performance pattern setting process of step S6010, a value corresponding to the performance pattern selected in the performance determination process of step S6004 is set as the value of the performance status flag JF.

Specifically, in consideration of the value of the accessory effect pattern flag PF, if "no accessory effect" is selected, the value of the effect state flag JF is set to "2". On the other hand, when "with accessory performance (no development pattern, first development pattern, second development pattern, or third development pattern)" is selected, the value of the performance state flag JF is set to "3".

Thereafter, in step S6011, the value of the button operation flag BF is reset to "0", and this processing is ended.

Now, in step S6012 to which the process proceeds after a negative determination is made in step S6006, it is determined whether or not the performance pattern of the additional performance is "no accessory performance (JF=2)", taking into account the value of the performance status flag JF. Determine.

Here, if the determination is affirmative, that is, if the performance pattern is "no accessory performance", notification setting processing is performed in step S6013.

By performing this notification setting process, on the display section 42a of the decorative pattern display device 42, a notification effect is displayed to notify that the accessory effect will not be performed, such as displaying characters such as "Unfortunately it does not move". is executed.

Thereafter, in step S6014, the value of the performance state flag JF is set to "9", which means that the accessory performance will not progress any further, and the process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6012, the process moves to step S6015, and it is determined whether or not the value of the production state flag JF is "3".

If an affirmative determination is made here, it is assumed that although the performance pattern is "with accessory performance (JF=3)", it is currently in the stage before starting the accessory drive performance, and in step S6016 the accessory drive setting is performed. Perform the process and end this process.

In the accessory drive setting process of step S6016, the sub-control device 262 first reads out the accessory performance control data that defines the progress (operation process) of the accessory performance from the ROM 552, and stores this in a predetermined area of the RAM 553.

Thereafter, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads out a plurality of motion process data included in the accessory performance control data according to the time table, and also reads out the process timer included in the motion process data. While managing the operation time based on the value, the process corresponding to the operation process data is executed.

The plurality of motion process data includes, for example, controlling the vertical drive mechanism 803 (vertical movement motor 805) of the performance accessory unit 761 to lower, raise, or stop the accessory main body 802. Data specifying the operation process, data specifying the operation process such as driving and controlling the rotating body drive motor 817 to rotate or stop the rotating body 820, driving controlling the LED 813c, and controlling the drive motor 817 for the rotating body 820 It includes data that specifies operating processes such as turning on, turning off, and blinking the light.

As a result, in this embodiment, when the performance pattern is "with accessory performance", when the player presses the performance button 125, the accessory main body 802 is first moved to the standby position (the upper side 47a of the center frame 47). (refer to Figure 14).

Then, the accessory main body 802 descends to the production position and stops so as to cover a part of the display part 42a of the decorative pattern display device 42, and then the rotating body 820 starts rotating and the light emitting body 850 behind it stops. It stays lit all the time.

Note that when the rotating body 820 starts rotating, a process is performed in which the value of the acceleration counter related to the rotating body drive motor 817 is set to "25", and a predetermined value is set to the value of the predetermined rotation process timer KT. Set the value (15 seconds in this embodiment).

Once the rotating body 820 starts rotating, it continues to rotate until the value of the rotation process timer KT becomes "0". Note that the process of subtracting the rotation process timer KT is performed separately in other processes (step S3911) within the normal process.

Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the rotating body 820 enters the constant speed rotation state (after the series of rotation start operation processes are completed), the sub-control device 262 starts executing the accessory performance as the value of the performance state flag JF. "4" is set to indicate that it is later, and a predetermined value (5 seconds in this embodiment) is set to the value of the operation valid timer ST.

At the same time, a display setting process is performed on the display section 42a of the decorative pattern display device 42 to perform a development request display effect.

By performing this display setting process, in addition to the roulette effect, characters such as "Please press the button" are displayed on the display section 42a of the decorative pattern display device 42, so that the player can see the effect button 125. A display effect prompting the user to operate is executed.

Now, in step S6017 to which the transition is made after a negative determination is made in step S6015, taking into account the value of the performance state flag JF, the current performance initial state (JF=4 ).

In this embodiment, the performance mode in the initial state of the performance after the execution of the role performance is started and before the development of the performance is one of the "first development pattern", "second development pattern", and "third development pattern". The same is true even when .

Here, if a negative determination is made, that is, if the performance is not in the initial state of the accessory performance (JF≧5), the process moves to step S6030.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6017, that is, if the accessory effect is in the initial state (the rotating body 820 is rotating at a constant speed and the light emitter 850 is constantly lit), in step S6018, the operation effective timer is It is determined whether the value of ST is "0".

Here, if the determination is affirmative, that is, if the value of the operation valid timer ST is "0", the player does not press the performance button 125 during the initial state of the accessory performance, and the operation validity period expires. If the time has passed, the process moves to step S6019.

In step S6019, the value of the performance state flag JF is set to "9", which means that the accessory performance will not progress any further, and the process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6018, that is, if the value of the operation valid timer ST is not "0", the process moves to step S6020.

In step S6020, taking into account the value of the button operation flag BF, it is determined whether or not the player pressed the performance button 125 (BF=1) during the initial state of the accessory performance (during the valid operation period). do.

If a negative determination is made in step S6020, that is, if the production button 125 is not pressed, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, that is, if the production button 125 is pressed, it is determined in step S6021 whether or not the value of the accessory production pattern flag PF is "1" corresponding to "no development pattern". Determine.

If an affirmative determination is made here, that is, if the development effect pattern is a "non-development pattern", notification setting processing is performed in step S6022.

By performing this notification setting process, on the display section 42a of the decorative pattern display device 42, a notification effect is displayed to notify that the development effect will not be performed, for example, characters such as "Unfortunately, it is not developed" are displayed. is executed.

Thereafter, in step S6023, the value of the performance state flag JF is set to "9", which means that the accessory performance will not progress any further, and the process ends.

Now, if a negative determination is made in step S6021, the process moves to step S6024, and it is determined whether the value of the accessory production pattern flag PF is "2" corresponding to the "first development pattern".

If an affirmative determination is made here, that is, if the developed effect pattern is the "first developed pattern," a first developed effect setting process is performed in step S6025, and the present process is ended.

In the first development effect setting process, the sub-control device 262 first sets a predetermined value (for example, a predetermined time of 5 seconds) to the value of the blinking process timer, and also sets the value of the effect state flag JF after the development of the accessory effect. Set the meaning "5".

Subsequently, the sub-control device 262 reads first blinking pattern data that defines a blinking pattern (first blinking pattern) of the light emitter 850 corresponding to the first development pattern from the ROM 552, and stores it in a predetermined area of the RAM 553. do.

Thereafter, the sub-control device 262 turns on the light emitting body 850 based on the first blinking pattern data, taking into account the rotational position information of the rotating body 820 (the amount of rotational displacement based on the number of drive pulse signals) and the value of the blinking process timer. The first light emitter blinking control is executed to periodically switch between the state and the off state.

Specifically, settings are made to sequentially output control signals to the light emission control section of the performance accessory unit 761. Based on this control signal output setting process, in the next external output process (step 3912), control signals are sequentially output to the light emission control section of the performance accessory unit 761, so that the light emitting body 850 (LED 813c) Controlled on/off.

Note that, although the same applies to other light-emitting body blinking controls to be described later, in the first light-emitting body blinking control, it is preferable that the duty ratio (the ratio occupied by the lighting state in one blinking cycle) is relatively small. Therefore, in this embodiment, the duty ratio is set to 10% or less. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when changing the blinking cycle of the light emitting body 850, the blinking cycle is changed by increasing/decreasing the light-off period without changing the lighting period. Of course, the method of changing the blinking cycle of the light emitter 850 is not limited to this, and other methods may be adopted.

In the first light emitter blinking control, the light emitter blinking control that satisfies the following relational expression (J1) is executed. In other words, the light-emitting body blinking control is executed such that the blinking cycle T _r of the light-emitting body 850 is longer than the area movement cycle T _p (in this embodiment, T _p =72 msec) in which the decoration area E actually moves by one section. .

T _p < _Tr < {(3/2)×T _p } ・・・・・・(J1)
Here, T _r : blinking period of the light emitter 850, T _p : area movement period.

However, in this embodiment, the blinking period T _r of the light emitting body 850 is fixed to an arbitrary period TS1 between T _p < T _r <{(3/2)×T _p } (see FIG. 63). . In addition, in FIG. 63, the start timing of the area movement period _Tp is shown by a pulse waveform.

By performing the first light emitter blinking control, for example, as shown in FIG. 64(a), light is emitted at a predetermined timing when the origin G of the rotating body 820 is located directly above (see the left diagram in FIG. 64(a)). After the area movement period T _p in which the decoration area E has moved by one block (36 degrees) after the light-emitting body 850 lights up [see the right diagram of FIG. Lighting is not performed, and the light emitter 850 lights up after the blinking period T _r has elapsed. At this time, the origin G of the rotating body 820 is located at a position G' that is further advanced than 36 degrees (one section of the decorative area E).

By repeating this periodically, it appears that the decoration area E (transparent parts 831a to 831e, 832) is rotating in the same positive direction as the actual rotation direction of the rotating body 820 (the wagon wheel effect).

Note that the same applies to other light emitting body blinking controls to be described later, but the subtraction process of the blinking process timer is separately performed in other processes (step S3911) within the normal process. When the light emitting body 850 starts blinking, the blinking control is continued until the value of the blinking process timer becomes "0".

Here, the principle of the wagon wheel effect will be explained. When the rotation period of one rotation of the rotating body 820 is T _c (seconds) and the angular velocity ω (rad/second) of the rotating body 820, the relational expression ω=2π/T _c holds true.

In this embodiment, it takes 720 msec (=2 msec x 360 pulses) for the rotating body 820 to make one revolution, so the rotation period T _c is T _c =720/1000, and the angular velocity ω (rad/sec) is ω=2π/T _c =(2π×1000)/720.

Further, the blinking period of the light emitting body 850 is set as T _r (seconds), and the amount of rotation angle of the rotating body 820 per one blinking period of the light emitting body 850 [after the light emitting body 850 lights up at a predetermined timing, the next light emitting body If the amount of rotational displacement of the rotating body 820 (the amount of angle by which the decoration area E advances) during T _r (seconds) until 850 lights up is θ, then the relational expression θ=ω×T _r holds true.

Therefore, when ten decorative areas E are arranged at equal intervals in the rotational direction of the rotating body 820, the apparent visibility of the rotating body 820 in the range of 0<θ≦{360°/10} is , becomes as follows.

When the rotation angle amount θ satisfies the following relational expression (H1), it appears that the rotating body 820 (decoration area E) is rotating in the same positive direction as the actual rotation direction.

0<θ<{360°/(2×10)}
0<θ<18°...(H1)
When the rotation angle amount θ satisfies the relational expression (H2) below, the rotating body 820 (decoration area E) is visually recognized as being stationary even though the number of decoration areas E has doubled. Ru. However, the decorative area E configured as in this embodiment is visually recognized in a state where some of the decorative areas E are overlapped and mixed together.

θ=360°/(2×10)
θ=18°...(H2)
When the rotation angle amount θ satisfies the following relational expression (H3), it appears that the rotating body 820 (decoration area E) is rotating in a direction opposite to the actual rotation direction.

{360°/(2×10)}<θ<{360°/10}
18°<θ<36°...(H3)
When the rotation angle amount θ satisfies the following relational expression (H4), the rotating body 820 (decoration area E) is visually recognized as being stationary.

θ={360°/10}
θ=36°...(H4)
In other words, for the light emitter 850 that lights up every period T _r (seconds), the decorative area E of the rotating body 820 that rotates at a period T _c (=720 msec) (the decorative area that moves by one section at a period T _c /10) If E) is always at the same position, the decorative area E will be visually recognized as being stationary.

On the other hand, if the amount of movement of decoration area E is larger than this, it will be visually recognized that decoration area E is rotating in the normal direction, and if the amount of movement of decoration area E is smaller than this, the decoration area E will be seen to be rotating in the opposite direction. It will be visually recognized as if the

However, the apparent direction of rotation changes at a period in which the rotation angle amount θ corresponds to half the decoration area E (18 degrees in this embodiment).

Here, when the area movement cycle in which the decoration area E moves by one section is T _p , the relational expression T _p =T _c /10 holds true. Therefore, in this embodiment, T _p =72 msec.

In other words, by making the blinking period T _r of the light emitting body 850 longer than an integral multiple of the area movement period T _p so as to satisfy the relational expression (H5) below, the rotating body 820 (decoration area E) can be visually recognized as rotating in the same positive direction as the actual rotation direction.

{T _p ×n}<T _r ...(H5)
n: an integer greater than or equal to 0, T _r : blinking period of the light emitter 850,
_Tp : Area movement period.

However, the upper limit is {(2n+1)/2}× _Tp . Here, by varying the blinking period T _r of the light emitting body 850 between {T _p ×n} < T _r < {(2n+1)/2} × T _p , the apparent rotational speed of the rotating body 820 can be changed. (The moving speed of the decoration area E) can be varied.

On the other hand, by making the blinking period T _r of the light emitting body 850 shorter than an integral multiple of the area movement period T _p so as to satisfy the relational expression (H6) below, the rotating body 820 (decoration area E) can be visually recognized as rotating in the opposite direction to the actual rotation direction.

T _r <{T _p × (n+1)} ・・・・・・(H6)
n: an integer greater than or equal to 0, T _r : blinking period of the light emitter 850,
_Tp : Area movement period.

However, the lower limit is {(2n+1)/2}× _Tp . Here, by varying the blinking period T _r of the light emitting body 850 between {(2n+1)/2}×T _p < _Tr < {T _p ×(n+1)}, the apparent rotational body 820 can be changed. The rotation speed (moving speed of the decoration area E) can be varied.

In addition, by setting the blinking period T _r of the light emitting body 850 to an integral multiple of the area movement period T _p so as to satisfy the relational expression (H7) below, the rotating body 820 (decoration area E) appears stationary. You can make it look like you are doing it.

T _r = {T _p × (n+1)} ・・・・・・(H7)
n: an integer greater than or equal to 0, T _r : blinking period of the light emitter 850,
_Tp : Area movement period.

Now, if a negative determination is made in step S6024, the process moves to step S6026, and it is determined whether the value of the accessory production pattern flag PF is "3" corresponding to the "second development pattern".

If an affirmative determination is made here, that is, if the developed effect pattern is the "second developed pattern," a second developed effect setting process is performed in step S6027, and the present process is ended.

In the second development effect setting process, the sub-control device 262 first sets a predetermined value (for example, a predetermined time of 5 seconds) to the value of the blinking process timer, and also sets the value of the effect state flag JF after the development of the accessory effect. Set the meaning "5".

Subsequently, the sub-control device 262 reads second blinking pattern data that defines a blinking pattern (second blinking pattern) of the light emitter 850 corresponding to the second development pattern from the ROM 552, and stores it in a predetermined area of the RAM 553. do.

Thereafter, the sub-control device 262 turns on the light emitting body 850 based on the second blinking pattern data, taking into account the rotational position information of the rotating body 820 (rotational displacement amount based on the number of drive pulse signals) and the value of the blinking process timer. The second light emitter blinking control is executed to periodically switch between the state and the off state.

Specifically, settings are made to sequentially output control signals to the light emission control section of the performance accessory unit 761. Based on this control signal output setting process, in the next external output process (step 3912), control signals are sequentially output to the light emission control section of the performance accessory unit 761, so that the light emitting body 850 (LED 813c) Controlled on/off.

In the second light-emitting body blinking control, light-emitting body blinking control that satisfies the following relational expression (J2) is executed. That is, the light emitting body blinking control is performed such that the blinking period T _r of the light emitting body 850 is the area movement period T _p (T _p =72 msec in this embodiment).

T _r = T _p (J2)
Here, T _r : blinking period of the light emitter 850, T _p : area movement period.

In addition, in FIG. 63, the blinking period _Tr of the light emitter 850 according to the second blinking pattern is expressed as a period TS2, which is the same as the area movement period _Tp .

By performing the second light emitting body blinking control, for example, as shown in FIG. 64(b), light is emitted at a predetermined timing when the origin G of the rotating body 820 is located directly above (see the left diagram in FIG. 64(b)). The light emitting body 850 lights up again after an area movement period T _p in which the decorative area E has moved by one section (36°) [see the right diagram in FIG. 64(b)] after the body 850 lights up. In other words, the origin G of the rotating body 820 is located at a position G' advanced by 36 degrees (one section of the decoration area E).

By repeating this periodically, it is possible to produce a phenomenon (wagon wheel effect) in which the decorative area E (each of the transparent parts 831a to 831e, 832) appears to be stationary.

Now, if a negative determination is made in step S6026, the process moves to step S6028, and it is determined whether the value of the accessory performance pattern flag PF is "4" corresponding to the "third development pattern".

If an affirmative determination is made here, that is, if the developed effect pattern is the "third developed pattern," a third developed effect setting process is performed in step S6029, and the present process is ended.

In the third development effect setting process, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the blinking process timer to a predetermined value (for example, a predetermined time of 5 seconds), and also sets the value of the effect state flag JF as the value after the development of the accessory effect. Set the meaning "5".

Subsequently, the sub-control device 262 reads third blinking pattern data that defines a blinking pattern (third blinking pattern) of the light emitter 850 corresponding to the third development pattern from the ROM 552, and stores this in a predetermined area of the RAM 553. do.

Then, based on the third blinking pattern data, the sub-control device 262 turns on the light emitting body 850 while taking into account the rotational position information of the rotating body 820 (the amount of rotational displacement based on the number of drive pulse signals) and the value of the blinking process timer. The third light emitter blinking control is executed to periodically switch between the state and the off state.

Specifically, settings are made to sequentially output control signals to the light emission control section of the performance accessory unit 761. Based on this control signal output setting process, in the next external output process (step 3912), control signals are sequentially output to the light emission control section of the performance accessory unit 761, so that the light emitting body 850 (LED 813c) Controlled on/off.

In the third light emitter blinking control, the light emitter blinking control that satisfies the following relational expression (J3) is executed. In other words, the light-emitting body blinking control is performed such that the blinking cycle T _r of the light-emitting body 850 is shorter than the area movement cycle T _p (in this embodiment, T _p =72 msec) in which the decoration area E actually moves by one section. .

{(1/2)×T _p }< _Tr <T _p ...(J3)
Here, T _r : blinking period of the light emitter 850, T _p : area movement period.

However, in this embodiment, the blinking period T _r of the light emitting body 850 is fixed to an arbitrary period TS3 between {(1/2)×T _p }<T _r <T _p (see FIG. 63). .

By performing the third light emitting body blinking control, for example, as shown in FIG. 64(c), light is emitted at a predetermined timing when the origin G of the rotating body 820 is located directly above (see the left diagram in FIG. 64(c)). After the flashing period _Tr has elapsed since the light-emitting body 850 lights up again, the decoration area E has not yet moved by one section (36 degrees).

Therefore, at the above-mentioned timing when the light emitter 850 lights up again, the origin G of the rotating body 820 is on the near side of the position advanced by 36 degrees (one section of the decoration area E), which is located after the area movement period T _p has elapsed. It will be visually recognized at position G' [see the right diagram in FIG. 64(c)].

By repeating this periodically, it appears that the decoration area E (each of the transparent parts 831a to 831e, 832) is rotating in the opposite direction to the actual rotation direction of the rotating body 820 (the wagon wheel effect).

Now, in step S6030 to which the transition is made after a negative determination is made in step S6017, it is determined whether or not the role performance is currently in the developing state (JF=5), taking into consideration the value of the performance state flag JF. . If a negative determination is made here, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6030, that is, if the accessory performance is in the developing state (the rotating body 820 is rotating at a constant speed and the light emitter 850 is blinking), the process moves to step S6031.

In step S6031, it is determined whether the value of the rotation process timer KT is "0". If a negative determination is made here, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6031, that is, if it is the end timing of the accessory performance (stop timing of the rotating body 820), end setting processing is performed in step S6032, and the present processing is ended.

In the end setting process of step S6032, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the performance state flag JF to "9", which means that the accessory performance will not progress any further.

Subsequently, the sub-control device 262 reads from the ROM 552 the accessory performance control data that defines the end operation process of the accessory performance, and stores it in a predetermined area of the RAM 553.

Based on this, processing for setting the light emitting body 850 to turn off, processing for setting the stop of the rotating body drive motor 817, and operation setting processing for raising the accessory main body 802 to the standby position are sequentially performed, and the accessory production ends.

As described in detail above, according to the present embodiment, the rotation direction and rotation speed of the rotating body 820 can be changed by using the wagon wheel effect in the performance of an accessory using the rotating body 820. The apparent rotational operation mode of the rotating body 820 can be changed simply by changing the blinking period of the light emitting body 850 without changing the operation mode.

In other words, the rotating body drive motor 817 can be driven and controlled using a constant control pattern without preparing a large number of control patterns for the rotating body drive motor 817, so that the complexity of motor control can be suppressed. can. For example, in the present embodiment, the rotary body drive motor 817 is configured to perform rotational drive control to rotate at a constant speed in only one direction (forward direction) (a configuration in which rotational drive control is not performed in the reverse direction).

Note that the present invention is not limited to the content described in the embodiment described above, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Here, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the above embodiment, or a part or all of them may be arbitrarily combined and applied to the above embodiment. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments.

(a) It may be implemented as a pachinko machine of a different type from the above embodiment. For example, in the above embodiment, the "high support mode" is always given after the jackpot ends regardless of the jackpot type, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the "high support mode" is not given depending on the jackpot type. Good too.

For example, it is implemented as a pachinko machine where the lottery mode ("high probability mode" or "low probability mode") is not switched, but only the winning support mode ("high support mode" or "low support mode") is switched. Good too. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to paying out prize balls, the pachinko machine may be configured to provide points corresponding to the prize balls won by the player to a storage medium such as a magnetic card.

(b) In addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as an arrangement ball machine and similar mahjong balls. Furthermore, as gaming machines other than pachinko machines, there are slot machines that are reel-type gaming machines, and gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine (particularly slot machines that use game balls as a playing medium). Of course, it can also be implemented as a game machine.

Here, one embodiment of the slot machine will be described in more detail with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66.

The slot machine 2010 includes a housing 2011 forming an outer shell thereof. The housing 2011 is formed into a box shape with an open front. A front door 2012 is provided on the front side of the housing 2011 so that it can be opened and closed.

A game panel 2030 is provided on the front door 2012. The game panel 2030 has three display windows 2031L, 2031M, and 2031R formed therein. The inside of the slot machine 2010 becomes visible through each display window 2031L, M, R.

A reel unit 2040 constituting the main variable display means is provided inside the housing 2011 (see FIG. 66). As shown in FIG. 66, the reel unit 2040 includes a left reel 2042L, a middle reel 2042M, and a right reel 2042R, each of which is formed into a cylindrical (annular) shape as a rotating body, within a substantially box-shaped metal frame 2041. .

Each reel 2042L, M, R is rotatably supported. More specifically, the reels 2042L, M, and R are arranged so that their rotational axes are aligned on the same axis that extends substantially horizontally, and the reels 2042L, M, and R are aligned with each other in the display windows 2031L, M, and R. There is a one-to-one correspondence. Therefore, a portion of the surface of each reel 2042L, M, R is visible through the corresponding display window 2031L, M, R, respectively.

Each reel 2042L, M, R is individually connected to a stepping motor 2061 (see FIG. 66) as a driving means. This allows each reel 2042L, M, and R to rotate individually.

Further, the reel unit 2040 is provided with a rotational position detection sensor (not shown) for detecting the rotational position of each reel 2042L, M, R, corresponding to each reel 2042L, M, R individually. . Then, based on the detection results of these rotational position detection sensors, rotation control of each reel 2042L, M, and R is performed.

For example, in this embodiment, the stepping motor 2061 is set to rotate once by applying a drive signal (excitation signal) of 504 pulses. In other words, each reel 2042L, M, R is configured to rotate by an amount of rotation corresponding to the number of drive signals, such that each reel 2042L, M, R changes its angle by 5 degrees with a 7-pulse drive signal. There is. Furthermore, the rotational position of the stepping motor 2061, that is, the rotational position of each reel 2042L, M, and R, can be controlled by this drive signal.

A band-shaped belt (not shown) is wound around the outer peripheral surface of each reel 2042L, M, and R. On the outer peripheral surface of this belt, a large number of symbols ZS as identification information are printed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. Then, when the reels 2042L, M, and R rotate forward, the surfaces (symbols ZS) of the reels 2042L, M, and R are visually recognized through each display window 2031L, M, and R as if they were moving from top to bottom. be done.

Specifically, in this embodiment, 21 symbols ZS are drawn on the belt of each reel 2042L, M, and R. Therefore, at a predetermined position, it takes 24 pulses (=504 pulses/21 symbols) to switch from a predetermined symbol ZS to the next symbol ZS.

Then, by the number of pulses from the time when the rotational position of each reel 2042L, M, R is detected, it is possible to recognize which symbol ZS is visible from each display window 2031L, M, R, or Control can be performed to make the symbol ZS visible from each display window 2031L, M, and R.

Of the symbols ZS attached to each reel 2042L, M, R, the number of symbols that can be viewed as a whole through the display windows 2031L, M, R mainly depends on the vertical length of the display windows 2031L, M, R. Limited to a predetermined number. In this embodiment, each reel has three pieces. Therefore, when all the reels 2042L, M, and R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols ZS are visible to the player.

On the other hand, on the inside of each reel 2042L, M, R, a backlight 2062 is arranged as a light emitter that illuminates the symbols ZS that are visible from the rear through the display windows 2031L, M, R.

Further, in the belt of each reel 2042L, M, and R in this embodiment, a transparent portion ZL is formed between two circumferentially adjacent symbols ZS. That is, on the belt of each reel 2042L, M, R, a large number of transparent parts ZL are formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. Each light-transmitting part ZL is formed in the shape of a slit that extends in the width direction of the belt.

In addition, the belts of each reel 2042L, M, and R are made of a transparent resin film, etc., and the general parts with designs such as ZS are coated with so-called white coating to reduce light transmittance. is applied. On the other hand, each light-transmitting part ZL is in a substantially transparent state and is configured to have a higher light transmittance than the general part.

Although detailed illustration is omitted in FIG. 66 for the sake of simplicity, the symbols ZS attached to the reels 2042L, M, and R may be, for example, big bonus symbols for transitioning to a big bonus game. ``7'' symbol, a ``replay symbol'' for transitioning to a replay game, a ``watermelon'' symbol as a minor prize symbol for payout of a minor prize, a ``bell'' symbol, a ``cherry'' symbol, etc. However, on each reel 2042L, M, and R, the arrangement pattern of the symbols ZS is different.

A total of five combination lines are attached to the game panel 2030, three horizontally parallel lines and two diagonally crosswise lines connecting the respective display windows 2031L, M, and R. Corresponding to each of these combination lines, effective line display sections 2032, 2033, and 2034 are provided on the left side of the display windows 2031L, M, and R groups when viewed from the front.

The first valid line display section 2032 displays a notification by lighting or the like when the central horizontal line (center line) among the combination lines is validated. The second valid line display section 2033 displays a notification by lighting or the like when the upper and lower horizontal lines (upper line and lower line) of the combination lines are activated. The third valid line display section 2034 displays a notification by lighting or the like when a pair of diagonal lines (a right-down line and a right-up line) among the combination lines is activated. Then, when the symbol ZS stops in a predetermined combination on the activated combination line, that is, the active line, a prize is won, and predetermined medal payout processing, transition processing to a specific game, etc. are executed.

Now, below the game panel 2030, an operation area 2051 is provided. The operation area 2051 has a flat panel section 2051a and a vertical wall section 2051b.

A start lever 2071 is provided on the left side of the vertical wall portion 2051b. The start lever 2071 constitutes a start operation means that is operated to start rotating the reels 2042L, M, and R, that is, start variable display.

A left stop switch 2072L, a middle stop switch 2072M, and a right stop switch 2072R are provided on the right side of the start lever 2071. Each of the stop switches 2072L, M, and R constitutes a stop operation means that is operated to individually stop each of the rotating reels 2042L, M, and R.

Each stop switch 2072L, M, R is arranged approximately directly below the display window 2031L, M, R corresponding to the reel 2042L, M, R to be stopped.

A medal slot 2075 for inserting medals is provided on the right side of the flat panel portion 2051a. The medals inserted through the medal input port 2075 are guided to a hopper device (not shown) provided inside the housing 2011.

This hopper device is provided with a storage tank (not shown) for storing medals, a payout device (not shown) as a payout means for paying out medals to the player, and the like. The medals paid out from this payout device are discharged to a receiving tray 2018.

When medals are inserted from the medal slot 2075 at the start of the game, a bet state is entered. That is, when the first medal is inserted into the medal slot 2075, the first valid line display section 2032 lights up, the corresponding center line becomes the valid line, and the second medal is inserted into the medal slot 2075. When the medal is inserted, the second valid line display section 2033 lights up, and a total of three combined lines including the corresponding upper line and lower line become valid lines, and the third medal is inserted. When it is inserted into the opening 2075, the third valid line display section 2034 lights up, and all five combined lines including the corresponding pair of diagonal lines become valid lines.

A changeover switch 2080 is provided to the left of the start lever 2071. The changeover switch 2080 is configured to select a "credit mode" in which surplus inserted medals and medals won at the time of winning until reaching a predetermined maximum value (for example, 50 medals) are stored and stored as credit medals. This is for switching between the "direct mode" which is set to pay out the inserted medals and the medals obtained when winning as actual medals.

A first credit input switch 2077 is provided on the left side of the flat panel section 2051a. The first credit input switch 2077 is for inputting three credited virtual medals at once. Furthermore, a second credit input switch 2078 is provided to the left of the first credit input switch 2077. The second credit input switch 2078 is for inputting credited virtual medals one at a time.

At the top of the front door 2012, there is an upper lamp 2013 that lights up or flashes as the game progresses, and a speaker 2014 that plays various sound effects as the game progresses and notifies the player of the game status. An auxiliary display section 2015 is provided to provide various information to the player.

Although not shown, inside the housing 2011 there is a main control device that collectively manages various controls related to the game, an upper lamp 2013, a speaker 2014, an auxiliary display, etc. based on commands from the main control device. A sub-control device for driving and controlling the section 2015 and the like is provided.

Under the above configuration, when a player starts playing, he or she first operates the first credit input switch 2077 to place a bed. Then, when the player operates the start lever 2071 with at least one line being activated, the main controller rotates all the reels 2042L, M, and R at the same time.

Further, during the normal game, the main control device performs each lottery such as a small winning lottery, a replay game lottery, and a big bonus lottery at the timing when a detection signal based on the operation of the start lever 2071 is input.

If a small role flag is established as a result of the small role lottery, the right to stop an appropriate small role symbol on the active line is given only in that game. Furthermore, if a replay flag is established as a result of the replay game lottery, the right to proceed to the replay game is granted only in that game. Furthermore, if a big bonus flag is established as a result of the big bonus lottery, the right to proceed to the big bonus game is given, and the flag is held until the transfer to the big bonus game.

When the player operates the stop switches 2072L, M, and R after the above drawings are completed, the main controller controls each reel 2042L, M, and R corresponding to each operated stop switch 2072L, M, and R. Performs individual stop control.

The stopping positions of each of these reels 2042L, M, and R are determined based on each establishment flag that is the result of each of the above-mentioned drawings, with reference to various tables. At this time, if there is a symbol ZS corresponding to the establishment flag within four symbols before the active line in the rotational direction of each reel 2042L, M, R, then in principle, that symbol ZS will be actively drawn onto the active line. Therefore, if the reel stop timing has an error of four symbols before the reel stop timing, the error can be absorbed.

When each reel 2042L, M, R stops, the combination of stopped symbols ZS on the active line is a predetermined combination of symbols, i.e., a combination of small role symbols, a combination of replay symbols, a big bonus. In the case of a combination of symbols, the main control device performs payout control to pay out the number of medals corresponding to the combination of each stopped symbol. However, if it is a combination of replay symbols, no medals will be paid out.

Here, if the symbols ZS aligned on the active line are small winning symbols or a combination of symbols without any payout, the normal game is continued. On the other hand, when the combination of symbols ZS aligned on the active line is a combination of replay symbols, a replay game is executed in which the next game can be played for free by replay game control. Further, when the combination of symbols ZS aligned on the active line is a combination of big bonus symbols, a big bonus game is executed by big bonus control.

As described above, inside each reel 2042L, M, and R of the slot machine 2010, a backlight 2062 as a light emitter is arranged. Furthermore, a large number of transparent parts ZL are formed on the belt of each reel 2042L, M, and R at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

With this configuration, a strobe phenomenon can be caused by executing light emitting blinking control in which the backlight 2062 periodically repeats a lit state and a non-lit state while the reels 2042L, M, and R are rotating. As a result, similar to the above embodiment, it becomes possible to perform various performances triggered by the operation of the start lever 2071 and stop switches 2072L, M, and R, or in accordance with a predetermined performance program, thereby improving interest. can be achieved.

(c) The configuration (shape, number, arrangement, etc.) of the rotating body is not limited to the above embodiment.

For example, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to include a variable display device made of a rotating body, such as the reel unit 2040 (reels 2042L, M, R) of the slot machine 2010 described in (b) above. Conversely, a configuration may be adopted in which the slot machine 2010 is equipped with a rotating body such as the rotating body 820 of the performance accessory unit 761 as a performance accessory.

Alternatively, it may be configured to include an endless belt-like rotating body that is stretched between a drive roller connected to a motor and a driven roller that is rotatably supported and rotates as the motor is driven. .

Of course, these rotating bodies may be configured to perform effects using a strobe phenomenon (wagon wheel effect).

(d) The structure (shape, number, arrangement, etc.) related to the light-transmitting portion is not limited to the above embodiment.

For example, on the front surface of the rotating body 820 in the above embodiment, ten decorative areas E are formed at equal angular intervals of 36 degrees around the rotation axis of the rotating body 820, and each decorative area E has a first light-transmitting area. A portion 831a to a fifth transparent portion 831e are formed, and a boundary transparent portion 832 is formed at the boundary between two adjacent decorative areas E.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, 20 circular light-transmitting parts may be formed on the front surface of the rotating body 820 at equal angular intervals of a predetermined angle of 18 degrees around the rotation axis of the rotating body 820.

Further, in order to make other transparent parts such as the decorative area E (first transparent part 831a to fifth transparent part 831e) stand out, the central transparent part 830 may be changed to a light blocking part.

Further, like the reels 2042L, M, and R of the slot machine 2010 described in (b) above, a rotating body with a plurality of symbols (identification information) attached to its periphery is provided, and the symbols are placed on a predetermined effective line. In a gaming machine configured such that a predetermined gaming value can be awarded when the symbols are lined up and stopped in a combination of functions as a transparent part, and the predetermined pattern appears to rotate forward, backward, or stand still due to a strobe phenomenon (wagon wheel effect) for navigation effects, winning (bonus) confirmation effects, small role confirmation effects, etc. It may be configured to perform an effect that is visually recognized as if the user is doing the same.

(e) The configuration of the motor is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, in the above embodiment, a stepping motor is used as the rotating body drive motor 817 that drives the rotating body 820, but a different type of motor may be used.

However, if a stepping motor whose rotation is controlled by a drive pulse signal is used, it is easier to perform a rotating body effect using a strobe phenomenon (wagon wheel effect) with higher accuracy.

(f) The configuration (shape, number, arrangement, etc.) of the light emitters is not limited to the above embodiment.

For example, the light emitting body 850 according to the above embodiment is configured to include an LED 813c as a light source (light emitting means) and a circular lens portion 812 as a lens cover, and is configured to uniformly emit surface light as a whole.

The light source is not limited to this, and for example, an organic EL (electroluminescence) or a fluorescent lamp may be used as the light source. However, from the viewpoint of responsiveness, it is preferable to use a light source whose light can be electrically controlled, such as the LED 813c.

Although the above embodiment does not specifically mention the lighting method of the LED 813c (drive control method in the lighting state), the lighting methods of the LED 813c include "dynamic lighting" in which the LED 813c blinks at high speed at a constant frequency, and "dynamic lighting" in which the LED 813c blinks at high speed at a constant frequency. An example of two lighting methods is "static lighting," in which a current is constantly applied to the lamp and the lamp remains lit.

Here, "dynamic lighting" is a lighting method in which the blinking interval is shortened at a high frequency, and to the human eye it appears as if the lighting is always on due to an afterimage phenomenon.

Generally, when the frequency is below 50Hz (flashing 50 times or less per second), flicker becomes noticeable to the human eye, and when the frequency is around 40Hz, blinking can be clearly recognized. Become.

Therefore, when performing a rotating body effect using a strobe phenomenon (wagon wheel effect), it is preferable that the light emitter blinking control be performed at a frequency of at least 40 Hz or less.

(g) The configuration (shape, function, arrangement, etc.) related to the operating means is not limited to the above embodiment.

For example, in the above embodiment, a production button 125 that can be pressed and operated by the player is provided as the operation means. The configuration is not limited to this, and may include a movable operating means such as a jog dial or a slide lever.

(h) In the above embodiment, when performing a rotating body effect using a strobe phenomenon (wagon wheel effect), the light emitting body is It is configured to execute the blinking control of 850.

The present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the actual rotation period (rotation speed) of the rotating body 820 is measured and the blinking control of the light emitting body 850 is executed based on the measurement result.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the rotation period (rotation speed) of the rotating body 820 is measured and the blinking period of the light emitting body 850 can be changed according to the measurement result.

For example, there is a risk that an error may occur between the rotation period of the rotating body 820 (the area movement period in which the decorative area E moves by one section) and the blinking period of the light emitting body 850 due to assembly errors during manufacturing, deterioration over time, and the like. In such a case, there is a possibility that the rotating object effect using the strobe phenomenon (wagon wheel effect) will not be performed appropriately. On the other hand, if the above configuration is configured such that the blinking cycle of the light emitting body 850 can be changed (adjusted) based on the measured value of the rotation cycle, the occurrence of such problems can be suppressed.

(i) The operating mode (rotation period, rotation direction, etc.) of the rotating body is not limited to the above embodiment.

For example, in the above embodiment, the rotational drive control is performed such that the rotating body 820 (rotating body drive motor 817) is rotated at a constant speed only in one direction (forward direction); It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which drive control is performed such that the rotation is performed.

Alternatively, the rotating body 820 (rotating body drive motor 817) may be configured to switch to a plurality of different constant speed rotation states. For example, it may be configured to be switchable between a low-speed constant-speed rotation state and a high-speed constant-speed rotation state.

Further, the rotation direction of the rotating body 820 may be switched in accordance with a predetermined presentation program or triggered by the operation of the presentation button 125. Of course, the rotation direction of the rotating body 820 may be changed multiple times.

In addition, in a configuration where the rotational direction and rotation period of the rotating body 820 are changed, when performing a rotating body effect using a strobe phenomenon (wagon wheel effect), the rotation direction and rotation period of the rotating body 820 are changed. The lighting period of the light emitter 850 may be changed as appropriate.

(j) The operation mode of the light emitting body (blinking cycle, emission color, brightness, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment.

For example, in the first light-emitting body blinking control related to the first advanced effect setting process (step S6025) of the above embodiment, the blinking period T _r of the light-emitting body 850 is T _p < T _r <{(3/2)×T _p }, but the blinking period T _r of the light emitting body 850 is not limited to this and can be changed between T _p < T _r < {(3/2)×T _p }. This may be a possible configuration. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which the apparent rotational speed of the rotating body 820 (decoration area E) changes. At this time, the blinking period _Tr of the light emitting body 850 may be changed in response to the player's operation of the effect button 125.

In addition, in the first development effect setting process (step S6025), the first light-emitting body blinking control in which the blinking cycle T _r of the light-emitting body 850 is longer than the area movement cycle T _p of the decoration area E is limited to the above embodiment. First, it is sufficient to execute within a range that satisfies {T _p ×n}<T _r <{(2n+1)/2}×T _p (here, n is an integer greater than or equal to 0).

In addition, in the second development effect setting process (step S6027), the second light emitting body blinking control in which the blinking period T _r of the light emitting body 850 is the same as the area movement period T _p of the decoration area E is not limited to the above embodiment. , T _r ={T _p ×(n+1)} (here, n is an integer greater than or equal to 0).

Further, in the third light-emitting body blinking control related to the third advanced effect setting process (step S6029), the blinking period T _r of the light-emitting body 850 is between {(1/2)×T _p }<T _r <T _p The blinking period T _r of the light emitting body 850 is fixed to an arbitrary period TS3, but is not limited to this, and can be changed between {(1/2)×T _p }<T _r <T _p You can also use it as That is, a configuration may be adopted in which the apparent rotational speed of the rotating body 820 (decoration area E) changes. At this time, the blinking period _Tr of the light emitting body 850 may be changed in response to the player's operation of the effect button 125.

In addition, in the third development effect setting process (step S6029), the third light-emitting body blinking control in which the blinking cycle T _r of the light-emitting body 850 is shorter than the area movement cycle T _p of the decoration area E is limited to the above embodiment. First, it may be executed within a range that satisfies {(2n+1)/2}×T _p <T _r <{T _p ×(n+1)} (here, n is an integer greater than or equal to 0).

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a light emitting body blinking control is performed that is a combination of at least two of the first light emitter blinking control, the second light emitting body blinking control, and the third light emitting body blinking control. For example, an effect in which the apparent operating mode of the rotating body 820 changes continuously, such as the rotating body 820 (decoration area E) apparently rotating in the forward direction, then coming to rest, and then rotating in the opposite direction. may be executed within a range that satisfies {T _p ×n}< _Tr ≦{T _p ×(n+1)} (where n is an integer greater than or equal to 0).

In addition, although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, the light emission color and brightness of the light emitting body 850 may be changed in accordance with the rotating body effect using the strobe phenomenon (wagon wheel effect). good.

(k) The rotation period of the rotating body and the blinking period of the light emitting body may be changed depending on the operation mode of the operation means operated by the player.

For example, the blinking cycle of the light emitter 850 may be changed depending on the number of times the player operates the performance button 125. For example, when the player repeatedly presses the effect button 125, the difference between the area movement period T _p of the decoration area E and the blinking period T _r of the light emitting body 850 gradually increases, and the appearance of the rotating body 820 (decoration area E) increases. It is also possible to create an effect in which the upper rotational speed gradually increases.

(l) In the above embodiment, the first light emitter blinking control, the second light emitter blinking control, and the third light emitter blinking control are started when the effect button 125 is operated by the player. The structure is as follows. The present invention is not limited to this, and the light emitting body blinking control may be started in accordance with a predetermined production program without being triggered by the operation of the operating means.

(m) In the above embodiment, the accessory performance using the performance accessory unit 761 is performed as an additional performance when the support continuous performance (roulette performance) is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. A configuration may also be adopted in which accessory performances using the performance accessory unit 761 are performed in different scenes, such as additional performances of reach performances.

(n) In the above embodiment, depending on the degree of expectation that the high support mode will continue to be provided (the degree of expectation that game value can be provided), there will be role effects, and further development effects (effects using the wagon wheel effect). The system is configured such that the rate at which this is performed changes.

Not limited to this, for example, if a winning result is obtained through a predetermined lottery process (result that gaming value is awarded such as a big hit, small win, high probability mode, high support mode, etc.) , a configuration may be adopted in which the proportion of accessory performances and further development performances (performances using the wagon wheel effect) being performed is higher than when no winning result is obtained.

In addition, only when the grant of high support mode continues (when the game value is granted), or when a winning result is obtained through the prescribed lottery process (big win, small win, high probability mode, high support mode It may also be configured such that the accessory performance or its development performance (performance using the wagon wheel effect) is performed as a confirmed performance only when a result in which a game value such as is given is obtained.

For example, if the rotating body 820 (decoration area E) apparently starts rotating in the opposite direction or becomes stationary at the same time as the player operates the production button 125, it means that the granting of the jackpot has been confirmed. It is also possible to configure the information to be notified to the person concerned.

(o) The difference between the area moving period T _p of the decorative area E and the blinking period T _r of the light emitter 850, depending on the degree of expectation that gaming value such as a jackpot, small win, high probability mode, high support mode, etc. can be provided. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which control is performed such that the value becomes large. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect is performed in which the apparent rotational speed of the rotating body 820 (decoration area E) changes depending on the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value can be provided.

For example, the higher the apparent rotation speed of the rotating body 820 (decoration area E), the higher the expectation that a game value can be provided, and the lower the apparent rotation speed, the lower the expectation that a game value can be provided. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which such an effect is performed.

(p) In the above embodiment, in a constant speed rotation state in which the rotating body 820 (rotating body drive motor 817) rotates at a constant speed, the development of the role performance (the production using the wagon wheel effect) is executed. The structure is as follows.

The invention is not limited to this, and the light emitting body blinking control (effect using the wagon wheel effect) may be executed even during the acceleration period or deceleration period of the rotating body 820 (rotating body drive motor 817).

However, during the acceleration period or deceleration period of the rotating body drive motor 817, the area movement period T _p of the decoration area E changes, so the blinking period T _r of the light emitting body 850 can be variably controlled in accordance with this. It may be configured as follows.

The technical ideas that can be understood from the above embodiments will be described below along with their effects.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a type of gaming machine. In a pachinko machine, for example, a game ball is fired into a game area by a firing device, and when the game ball enters a predetermined ball entry means provided in the game area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a winning state will occur. When the identification information is variably displayed on a predetermined display device and is stopped and displayed in a specific manner based on the result of the lottery, a winning state advantageous to the player occurs, and the player acquires gaming value. becomes possible.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, perform performances that involve mechanical movements such as movable accessories in order to increase the interest of players. For example, there are some that include a rotating body as a movable accessory and perform an effect of rotating the rotating body at a predetermined timing (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-109029).

However, there is still room for improvement in the performance using rotating bodies.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances and the like, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably perform performances using rotating bodies.

Means A1. a lottery means for performing a lottery process based on a predetermined opportunity;
A gaming machine comprising a gaming value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined gaming value when a winning result is obtained in the lottery process,
a rotating body rotatably provided;
a motor that rotates the rotating body;
a motor control means for driving and controlling the motor;
a light emitting body capable of emitting a predetermined light;
and a light emission control means capable of controlling the light emitting body,
The rotating body has M (M is an integer of 1 or more) light-transmitting parts capable of transmitting the light emitted from the light-emitting body at equal intervals at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the rotating body (for example, arranged at equal angular intervals of a predetermined angle of 360°/M around the rotation axis,
The light emission control means is configured to cause the light-emitting body to move faster than the light-transmitting part movement period (time period during which the rotating body rotates by 360°/M) in which the light-transmitting part moves by the predetermined interval when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A game machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute light emitting body blinking control that increases the blinking cycle.

The same applies to the following means, but the above-mentioned "predetermined trigger" includes, for example, "the trigger when a predetermined detection means detects the entry of a game ball into a predetermined ball entry means provided in the gaming area." ” and “a trigger in which a predetermined detection means detects that a starting operation means for starting a variable display on a predetermined display means is operated” are examples of modes.

Providing "gaming value" includes, for example, paying out game media such as prize balls, and providing a special gaming state advantageous to the player.

"Light-emitting body blinking control" is a control in which a light-emitting body periodically repeats a lighting state and a non-lighting state. Here, it is preferable that the duty ratio (the ratio occupied by the lighting state in one blinking cycle) is relatively small (for example, 10% or less).

"Rotating body" includes, for example, "a rotating body that is rotatable about the longitudinal direction of the game machine as its axis", "a rotating body that is rotatable about the left-right direction of the gaming machine", and "an endless belt-shaped body". This includes "rotating bodies".

Here, in the "rotating body rotatably provided around the longitudinal direction of the game machine", for example, in the main body of the rotating body having a substantially circular shape when viewed from the front (viewed from the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine), there are M light-transmitting parts. is provided so that the light emitted from the light emitting body can be transmitted along the rotation axis direction (the longitudinal direction of the game machine). In addition, in a "rotating body that is rotatably provided around the left-right direction of the game machine", for example, on the circumferential surface of the cylindrical rotary body body (cylindrical part) that is provided so as to surround the rotating shaft, M The light-transmitting portions are provided so that the light emitted from the light-emitting body can be transmitted along the radial direction of the rotating body.

Now, as stated in the above "Problems to be Solved by the Invention", there is still room for improvement in the performance using rotating bodies.

One problem is that there are mechanical limits to controlling the rotational drive of a rotating body using a motor or the like. As a result, depending on the mode of operation, the motion may appear slow, which may reduce the player's interest.

For example, there is a limit to the rotational speed of a rotating body (motor). Although it depends on the structure and performance of the motor, even if the motor is rotating at a high speed close to its own performance limit, it may not appear to the player that it is rotating fast.

Also, as a performance, there are scenes where you want to make it appear as if the rotating body has sped up even more than it is rotating at a constant speed, but it is difficult to perform this kind of drive control when the motor is rotating at high speed. Physically difficult. Even if the rotational speed becomes slightly faster, there is a possibility that the player will not feel that the speed has increased at all.

In this regard, according to the means A1, the M light transmitting parts rotate a rotating body arranged at regular intervals at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction, and when a predetermined condition is met, the light transmitting parts rotate at the predetermined intervals. The structure is configured to execute light emitting body blinking control in which the blinking cycle of the light emitting body is longer than the light transmitting part movement cycle in which the light transmitting part moves by one formation pitch interval (the period in which the light transmitting part moves by one formation pitch interval). .

As a result, the light-transmitting part that is visible to the player when the light-emitting body lights up at a predetermined timing will be visible at a position further than the distance corresponding to one formation pitch interval the next time the light-emitting body lights up. That will happen.

With such a configuration, according to the present means, a strobe phenomenon (wagon wheel effect) in which the rotating body (light-transmitting part) appears to be rotating in the same positive direction as the actual rotating direction is produced, and the rotating body It is possible to create a visual effect that gives the player the illusion that the rotating object is rotating faster than its actual speed, or a visual effect that gives the player the illusion that the rotating object is accelerating. .

As a result, it is possible to improve the interest by using the rotating body effect using the strobe phenomenon (wagon wheel effect).

Here, the principle of the wagon wheel effect will be explained. When the rotation period of one rotation of the rotating body is T _c (seconds) and the angular velocity of the rotating body is ω (rad/second), the relational expression ω=2π/T _c holds true.

Furthermore, let the blinking period of the light emitting body be T _r (seconds), and the amount of rotation angle of the rotating body per one blinking period of the light emitting body [from when the light emitting body lights up at a predetermined timing to when the light emitting body lights up next time] When the amount of rotational displacement of the rotating body (the amount of angle that the transparent portion advances) during T _r (seconds) is θ, the relational expression θ=ω×T _r holds true.

Therefore, if M (M is an integer of 1 or more) transparent parts are arranged at equal intervals in the rotational direction of the rotating body, the rotation of the rotating body in the range of 0<θ≦{360°/M} The apparent visual recognition mode is as follows.

When the rotation angle amount θ satisfies the following relational expression (1), it appears that the rotating body (transparent part) is rotating in the same positive direction as the actual rotation direction.

0<θ<{360°/2M} ...(1)
When the amount of rotation angle θ satisfies the relational expression (2) below, the rotating body (transparent part) is visually recognized as being stationary even though the number of transparent parts has doubled. . However, depending on the size and shape of the transparent parts, parts of them may appear to overlap.

θ=360°/2M...(2)
When the rotation angle amount θ satisfies the following relational expression (3), it appears that the rotating body (transparent part) is rotating in a direction opposite to the actual rotation direction.

{360°/2M}<θ<{360°/M}...(3)
When the rotation angle amount θ satisfies the following relational expression (4), the rotating body (light-transmitting portion) is visually recognized as being stationary.

θ={360°/M} ...(4)
In other words, if the transparent part of the rotating body that rotates with a period T _c (the transparent part that moves with a period T _c /M) is always in the same position with respect to the light emitting body that lights up every period T _r (seconds), then , the transparent portion will be visually recognized as being stationary.

On the other hand, if the amount of movement of the transparent part is larger than this, the transparent part will be visually perceived as rotating in the forward direction, and if the amount of movement of the transparent part is smaller than this, the transparent part will rotate in the opposite direction. It will be visually recognized as if the

The larger the difference between the blinking period T _r (seconds) of the light emitting body and the moving period T _c /M of the transparent part, the faster the apparent rotational speed of the rotating body (the moving speed of the transparent part). . However, when the amount of movement of the light-transmitting part is 1/2 of the formation interval of the light-transmitting part (the above-mentioned predetermined interval), the apparent rotation direction changes at the boundary (360°/2M).

Note that the above-mentioned relationship between the blinking period T _r (seconds) of the light-emitting body and the moving period T _c /M of the transparent part is established periodically each time the speed of the rotating body increases. The relational expressions (1) to (4) can be generalized to the following relational expressions (1)' to (4)', respectively. Here, n is an integer greater than or equal to 0.

{2πn/M}<θ<{π(2n+1)/M} ...(1)'
θ={π(2n+1)/M} ...(2)'
{π(2n+1)/M}<θ<{2π(n+1)/M} ...(3)'
θ={2π(n+1)/M} ...(4)'
Here, when the rotation period T _c of the rotating body is constant and the transparent part moving period in which the transparent part moves by one pitch is T _p , the relational expression T _p = T _c /M holds true. By controlling the light emitter to blink so as to satisfy the relational expression (5) below, the rotating body (transparent part) is visually perceived to be rotating in the same positive direction as the actual rotating direction. be able to.

{T _p ×n}<T _r (5)
n: an integer greater than or equal to 0, T _r : blinking period of the light emitting body, T _p : period of movement of the transparent part.

In other words, by making the flashing period T _r of the light emitting body longer than an integral multiple of the transparent part moving period T _p , the rotating body (transparent part) apparently rotates in the same positive direction as the actual rotation direction. It can be made to appear as if it is.

However, the upper limit is {(2n+1)/2}× _Tp . Here, by varying the blinking period T _r of the light emitting body between {T _p × n} < T _r < {(2n+1)/2} × T _p , the apparent rotational speed of the rotating body (transparent The moving speed of the light section can be varied.

On the other hand, by controlling the light emitter to blink so as to satisfy the relational expression (6) below, it appears that the rotating body (transparent part) is rotating in the opposite direction to the actual rotation direction. can be done.

T _r <{T _p × (n+1)} ・・・・・・(6)
n: an integer greater than or equal to 0, T _r : blinking period of the light emitting body, T _p : period of movement of the transparent part.

In other words, by making the flashing period T _r of the light emitting body shorter than an integral multiple of the transparent part movement period T _p , the rotating body (transparent part) appears to rotate in the opposite direction to the actual rotation direction. It can be made to appear as if it is.

However, the lower limit is {(2n+1)/2}× _Tp . Here, by varying the blinking period T _r of the light emitting body between {(2n+1)/2}×T _p < _Tr < {T _p ×(n+1)}, the apparent rotational speed of the rotating body can be changed. (The moving speed of the light-transmitting part) can be varied.

Further, by controlling the light emitting body to blink so as to satisfy the following relational expression (7), it is possible to visually recognize the rotating body (transparent portion) as if it were stationary.

T _r = {T _p × (n+1)} ・・・・・・(7)
n: an integer greater than or equal to 0, T _r : blinking period of the light emitting body, T _p : period of movement of the transparent part.

That is, by setting the blinking period T _r of the light emitting body to be an integral multiple of the light-transmitting part moving period T _p , it is possible to visually recognize the rotating body (light-transmitting part) as if it were stationary.

Here, one specific example will be given. For example, assuming a rotating body with one transparent part (M=1), the rotating body rotates at a rotation frequency f _c =10 Hz (10 times/second) = 1/T _c , When the light emitting body is blinked at a lighting frequency f _r =10 Hz (10 times/second) = 1/ _Tr , the rotating body (light-transmitting part) appears to be at a standstill.

On the other hand, when the light emitting body is blinked at f _r = 9 Hz (9 times/second) = 1/T _r , the rotating body (light-transmitting part) appears to increase the rotation frequency in the positive direction, which is the same as the actual rotation direction. It will be visually recognized as if it is rotating at 1 Hz.

On the other hand, when the light emitting body is blinked at f _r = 11 Hz (11 times/second) = 1/T _r , the rotating body (transparent part) appears to rotate at a rotation frequency of 1 Hz in the opposite direction to the actual rotation direction. It will be visually recognized as if it is rotating.

In this way, by using the wagon wheel effect, you can change the apparent appearance of the rotating body by simply changing the flashing cycle of the light emitting body without changing the rotating operation mode of the rotating body, such as the rotation direction or rotation speed of the rotating body. The rotational operation mode can be changed.

In other words, the motor can be driven and controlled using a constant control pattern at all times without preparing a large number of motor control patterns, so it is possible to suppress the complexity of motor control. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which rotational drive control is performed to rotate the motor at a constant speed in only one direction (forward direction) (a configuration in which rotational drive control is not performed in the reverse direction).

Means A2. a lottery means for performing a lottery process based on a predetermined opportunity;
A gaming machine comprising a gaming value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined gaming value when a winning result is obtained in the lottery process,
a rotating body rotatably provided;
a motor that rotates the rotating body;
a motor control means for driving and controlling the motor;
a light emitting body capable of emitting a predetermined light;
and a light emission control means capable of controlling the light emitting body,
The rotating body has M (M is an integer of 1 or more) light-transmitting parts that can transmit the light emitted from the light-emitting body at regular intervals at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the rotating body (for example, arranged at equal angular intervals of a predetermined angle of 360°/M around the rotation axis,
A gaming machine characterized in that the light emission control means is configured to be able to perform light emission blinking control that satisfies the following relational expression (α) when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

{T _p ×n}< _Tr <{(2n+1)/2}×T _p ...(α)
However, n: an integer greater than or equal to 0, T _r : blinking period of the light emitting body,
T _p : Transparent part movement period in which the transparent part moves by the predetermined interval.

According to the means A2, by executing the light emitting body blinking control which makes the blinking period T _r of the light emitting body longer than an integral multiple of the light transmitting part moving period T _p , the rotating body (transparent part) can be visually recognized as rotating in the same positive direction as the actual rotation direction. As a result, the same effects as the above means A1 are achieved.

Means A3. The gaming machine according to means A1 or A2, wherein the light emitting control means is capable of starting the light emitting body blinking control when a predetermined operation means is operated by a player.

According to the means A3, the performance that produces the above-mentioned visual effect is executed when the player operates the operating means. This strengthens the player's awareness that he or she is actively participating in the game, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, if the configuration is such that the rotation mode of the rotating body is only mechanically changed without performing the above-mentioned light emitting body blinking control, the speed of the rotating body may be changed when the operating means is operated. If an attempt is made to perform a performance that changes the speed of the rotating body, there will be a time lag between the time the player operates the operating means and the time the player recognizes that the speed of the rotating body has changed, making the player feel uncomfortable. There is a risk.

In this regard, according to the present means, by performing the light-emitting body blinking control as described above, operational responsiveness can be improved and the above-mentioned problems can be reduced. In other words, the player can visually see that the speed of the rotating body changes at the timing when the player operates the operating means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Means A4. The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A3, wherein the light emission control means is configured to be able to change the blinking cycle of the light emitting body.

According to the above means A4, the apparent rotational speed of the rotating body (transparent part) can be changed by changing the blinking period of the light emitting body. As a result, it is possible to diversify rotating body effects using the strobe phenomenon (wagon wheel effect). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Means A5. The gaming machine according to means A4, wherein the light emission control means is capable of changing the blinking cycle of the light emitting body when a predetermined operation means is operated by the player.

According to the above means A5, the player can strengthen his/her awareness that he or she is actively participating in the game, and can further improve his/her interest.

Means A6. The gaming machine according to means A4 or A5, wherein the light emission control means is capable of changing the blinking cycle of the light emitting body according to the operation mode of a predetermined operation means operated by the player.

Here, the "operation mode of the operating means" includes the number of operations, the amount of operation displacement, and the like. For example, the information includes the number of times a button-type operating means is pressed and the amount of operation displacement of a movable operating means such as a jog dial or a slide lever.

According to the above-mentioned means A6, the player can strengthen the awareness that he or she is actively participating in the game, and can further improve his or her interest.

Means A7. The light emitting control means includes at least a first light emitting body blinking control such that a difference between a blinking period of the light emitting body and a moving period of the transparent part is a predetermined period; is configured to be able to execute second light emitting body blinking control in which the difference between the blinking cycle of and the light-transmitting part movement cycle is large,
If a winning result is obtained through the lottery process, the second light emitting body blinking control is executed more often than the first light emitting body blinking control. A gaming machine according to any one of means A4 to A6.

According to the means A7, when a winning result is obtained through the lottery process, a performance in which the rotational speed of the rotating body (translucent part) appears to be faster than a performance in which the rotational speed of the rotating body (translucent part) appears to be slow. will be carried out more often.

In other words, the higher the apparent rotational speed of the rotating body, the higher the expectation that a gaming value will be awarded, and the lower the apparent rotational speed, the lower the expectation that a gaming value will be awarded.

In other words, an effect is performed in which the blinking cycle of the light emitting body is changed and the apparent rotational speed of the rotary body is changed in accordance with the degree of expectation that a game value can be given. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Means A8. The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A7, wherein the light emission control means is configured to be able to execute the light emitting body blinking control in a constant speed rotation state in which the motor rotates at a constant speed. .

According to the above means A8, by performing the light emitter blinking control under a stable situation in which the rotating body is rotating at a constant speed, a deviation between the blinking cycle of the light emitter and the moving cycle of the transparent part is less likely to occur, and strobe phenomenon occurs. (wagon wheel effect) can be appropriately produced. As a result, the above effects will be more successful.

In addition, as an effect, it is possible to create a visual effect that gives the player the illusion that a rotating body that is rotating at a constant speed suddenly accelerates.

Means A9. The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A8, wherein the light emission control means is configured to be able to execute the light emitting body blinking control during an acceleration period of the motor.

According to the above means A9, it is possible to produce a visual effect that gives the player an illusion as if the rotating body has suddenly accelerated.

When the motor is actually accelerated rapidly (when the acceleration period is shortened), there is a possibility that the load on the rotating body, the motor, etc. becomes large. On the other hand, according to the present means, even though the acceleration period is set long, the player can visually perceive the acceleration as if it were suddenly accelerated, thereby reducing the load on the rotating body, motor, etc. be able to. As a result, the durability of the rotating body, motor, etc. can be improved.

However, during the acceleration period of the motor, the light-transmitting section movement cycle gradually becomes shorter, so the blinking cycle of the light-emitting body may have to be variably controlled in accordance with this.

Means A10. The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A9, wherein the light emission control means is configured to be able to execute the light emitter blinking control during a deceleration period of the motor.

According to the above means A10, it is possible to produce, as a performance, a visual effect that gives the player the illusion that the rotating body is rotating as before during the deceleration period of the rotating body. Furthermore, by stopping the light emitting body blinking control in accordance with the actual stop of the rotating body, it is possible to make it appear to the player that the rotating body has suddenly stopped.

When the motor is actually suddenly decelerated (when the deceleration period is shortened), the load on the rotating body, the motor, etc. may increase due to the influence of inertia and the like. On the other hand, according to the present means, even though the deceleration period is set long, the player can see it as if it had suddenly stopped, thereby reducing the load on the rotating body, motor, etc. be able to. As a result, the durability of the rotating body, motor, etc. can be improved.

However, during the deceleration period of the motor, the period of movement of the light-transmitting part gradually becomes longer, so that the blinking period of the light-emitting body may have to be variably controlled in accordance with this.

Means A11. Any of the means A1 to A10 is characterized in that the method is configured such that when a winning result is obtained through the lottery process, the proportion of the predetermined conditions being satisfied is higher than when a winning result is not obtained. A gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means A11, when a winning result is obtained through the lottery process, the light emitting body blinking control is performed more often than when a winning result is not obtained.

In other words, if an effect that causes a strobe effect (wagon wheel effect) in which the rotating body (transparent part) appears to be rotating in the same positive direction as the actual rotating direction is performed, the gaming value If the expectation level is high that the player can be given, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation.

As a result, the player actively participates in the game performance, for example by operating the operating means, and can further increase interest.

Means A12. The game according to any one of means A1 to A11, characterized in that the light emitting body is provided so as to emit surface light corresponding to at least a predetermined section in the rotating direction that is visible to the player of the rotating body. Machine.

If a plurality of light emitters are provided intermittently in a predetermined section in the rotating direction of the rotating body, spots of light may occur, making it difficult to properly produce a strobe effect (wagon wheel effect). There is.

On the other hand, according to the above means A12, it is possible to uniformly irradiate light to a predetermined section in the rotational direction of the rotating body, and therefore it is possible to appropriately produce a strobe phenomenon (wagon wheel effect).

Means A13. The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A12, wherein the light emitting body is fixed in a state separated from the rotating body.

In addition, as a performance device equipped with a rotating body, the rotating body is equipped with a plurality of light-emitting bodies, and while the rotating body is rotated, the light-emitting bodies are blinked in a predetermined pattern to display characters, figures, etc. as an afterimage. Devices such as versatile writers are known.

However, in a configuration in which a plurality of light emitters are disposed on a rotating body, the rotating body becomes large and heavy, and there is a risk that the operability of the rotating body may decrease.

Additionally, when multiple light emitters are installed on a rotary body that is driven to rotate, the light emitters installed on the rotary body and the control equipment installed outside the rotary body are connected. Signal lines and power lines must be connected via slip rings, etc., which may complicate wiring and control.

On the other hand, according to the above means A13, since the light emitting body is provided apart from the rotary body that is rotationally driven, wiring such as signal lines is not complicated, and the wiring is facilitated and simplified. can be achieved. In addition, since the weight of the rotating body can be reduced, deterioration in operability can be suppressed.

Means B1. a lottery means for performing a lottery process based on a predetermined opportunity;
A gaming machine comprising a gaming value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined gaming value when a winning result is obtained in the lottery process,
a rotating body rotatably provided;
a motor that rotates the rotating body;
a motor control means for driving and controlling the motor;
a light emitting body capable of emitting a predetermined light;
and a light emission control means capable of controlling the light emitting body,
The rotating body has M (M is an integer of 1 or more) light-transmitting parts capable of transmitting the light emitted from the light-emitting body at equal intervals at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the rotating body (for example, arranged at equal angular intervals of a predetermined angle of 360°/M around the rotation axis,
The light emission control means is configured to cause the light-emitting body to move faster than the light-transmitting part movement period (time period during which the rotating body rotates by 360°/M) in which the light-transmitting part moves by the predetermined interval when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute light emitting body blinking control that shortens the blinking cycle.

Now, as stated in the above "Problems to be Solved by the Invention", there is still room for improvement in the performance using rotating bodies.

One problem is that there are mechanical limits to controlling the rotational drive of a rotating body using a motor or the like. As a result, depending on the mode of operation, the motion may appear slow, which may reduce the player's interest.

For example, it is extremely difficult to perform drive control to suddenly reverse the rotational direction of a rotating body (motor) that is rotating in the forward direction to the opposite direction without providing a deceleration period due to the influence of inertia and the like. In addition, if the rotational direction of the rotating body (motor) is suddenly reversed, there is a risk that the load on the rotating body, motor, etc. will become significantly large. As a result, there is a risk that the assembled state of the rotating body and the motor may become loose, resulting in decreased durability.

In this regard, according to the means B1, the M light-transmitting parts rotate a rotating body arranged at regular intervals at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction, and when a predetermined condition is met, the light-transmitting parts rotate at the predetermined intervals. It is configured to execute light emitting body blinking control in which the blinking cycle of the light emitting body is shorter than the light transmitting part movement cycle in which the light transmitting part moves by one formation pitch interval (the period in which the light transmitting part moves by one formation pitch interval). .

As a result, the light-transmitting part that is visible to the player when the light-emitting body lights up at a predetermined timing is located at a position on the near side that has not yet reached the distance corresponding to one formation pitch interval when the light-emitting body lights up next time. It will be visible.

With such a configuration, according to the present means, it is possible to produce a strobe phenomenon (wagon wheel effect) in which the rotating body (light-transmitting part) appears to be rotating in a direction opposite to the actual rotation direction. . As a result, it is possible to create a visual effect that gives the player an illusion as if, for example, a rotating body that is rotating in the forward direction has suddenly and suddenly reversed.

As a result, it is possible to improve the interest by using the rotating body effect using the strobe phenomenon (wagon wheel effect).

Means B2. a lottery means for performing a lottery process based on a predetermined opportunity;
A gaming machine comprising a gaming value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined gaming value when a winning result is obtained in the lottery process,
a rotating body rotatably provided;
a motor that rotates the rotating body;
a motor control means for driving and controlling the motor;
a light emitting body capable of emitting a predetermined light;
and a light emission control means capable of controlling the light emitting body,
The rotating body has M (M is an integer of 1 or more) light-transmitting parts that can transmit the light emitted from the light-emitting body at regular intervals at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the rotating body (for example, arranged at equal angular intervals of a predetermined angle of 360°/M around the rotation axis,
A gaming machine characterized in that the light emission control means is configured to be able to perform light emission blinking control that satisfies the following relational expression (β) when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

{(2n+1)/2}×T _p < _Tr <{T _p ×(n+1)} ・・・・・・(β)
However, n: an integer greater than or equal to 0, T _r : blinking period of the light emitting body,
T _p : Transparent part movement period in which the transparent part moves by the predetermined interval.

According to the means B2, by executing the light emitting body blinking control in which the blinking period T _r of the light emitting body is made shorter than an integral multiple of the light transmitting part moving period T _p , the rotating body (transparent part) can be visually recognized as rotating in the opposite direction to the actual rotation direction. As a result, the same effects as the above means B1 are achieved.

Means B3. The gaming machine according to means B1 or B2, wherein the light emission control means is capable of starting the light emitting body blinking control when a predetermined operation means is operated by a player.

According to the means B3, the performance that produces the above-mentioned visual effect is executed when the player operates the operating means. This strengthens the player's awareness that he or she is actively participating in the game, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, if the above-mentioned light emitting body blinking control is not performed and the rotational operation mode of the rotating body is merely changed mechanically, the rotational direction of the rotating body is changed when the operating means is operated. If an attempt is made to reverse the direction of rotation of the rotor, there will be a time lag between when the player operates the operating means and when the rotation direction of the rotating body is actually reversed, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable. be.

In this regard, according to the present means, by performing the light-emitting body blinking control as described above, operational responsiveness can be improved and the above-mentioned problems can be reduced. In other words, the player can visually recognize that the rotational direction of the rotating body has changed at the timing when the player operates the operating means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Means B4. The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B3, wherein the light emission control means is configured to be able to change the blinking cycle of the light emitting body.

According to the above means B4, the same effects as the above means A4 are achieved.

Means B5. The gaming machine according to means B4, wherein the light emission control means is capable of changing the blinking cycle of the light emitting body when a predetermined operation means is operated by the player.

According to the above-mentioned means B5, the same effects as the above-mentioned means A5 are achieved.

Means B6. The gaming machine according to means B4 or B5, wherein the light emission control means is capable of changing the blinking cycle of the light emitting body according to the operation mode of a predetermined operation means operated by the player.

According to the above-mentioned means B6, the same effects as the above-mentioned means A6 are achieved.

Means B7. The light emitting control means includes at least a first light emitting body blinking control such that a difference between a blinking period of the light emitting body and a moving period of the transparent part is a predetermined period; is configured to be able to execute second light emitting body blinking control in which the difference between the blinking cycle of and the light-transmitting part movement cycle is large,
If a winning result is obtained through the lottery process, the second light emitting body blinking control is executed more often than the first light emitting body blinking control. A gaming machine according to any one of means B4 to B6.

According to the above-mentioned means B7, the same effects as the above-mentioned means A7 are achieved.

Means B8. The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B7, wherein the light emission control means is configured to be able to execute the light emitting body blinking control in a constant speed rotation state in which the motor rotates at a constant speed. .

According to the means B8, the same effects as the means A8 are achieved. In addition, as an effect, it is possible to create a visual effect that gives the player the illusion that a rotating body that is rotating at a constant speed in the forward direction suddenly turns around suddenly.

Means B9. The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B8, wherein the light emission control means is configured to be able to execute the light emitter blinking control during an acceleration period of the motor.

According to the means B9, during the acceleration period of the rotating body, the rotating body (transparent portion) can be visually recognized as apparently rotating in the opposite direction to the actual rotating direction.

Thereby, it is possible to create a visual effect in which the rotating body (light-transmitting portion) appears to be rotating in the opposite direction to the actual rotating direction without causing a time lag at the same time as the starting of the rotating body.

When the motor is actually suddenly accelerated in the opposite direction from a stopped state (when the acceleration period is shortened), the load on the rotating body, the motor, etc. may increase. On the other hand, according to the present means, even though the acceleration period in the forward direction is set long, the player can visually perceive it as if the acceleration was suddenly accelerated in the opposite direction. etc., can be reduced. As a result, the durability of the rotating body, motor, etc. can be improved.

However, during the acceleration period of the motor, the light-transmitting section movement cycle gradually becomes shorter, so the blinking cycle of the light-emitting body may have to be variably controlled in accordance with this.

Means B10. The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B9, wherein the light emission control means is configured to be able to execute the light emitting body blinking control during a deceleration period of the motor.

According to the means B10, during the deceleration period of the rotating body, the rotating body (transparent portion) can be visually recognized as apparently rotating in a direction opposite to the actual rotating direction.

As a result, even when the rotational direction of the rotating body is actually reversed, the rotational body changes to the actual rotational direction at a stage (deceleration period of forward rotation) before the actual switching timing of the rotational direction of the rotating body. It is possible to create a visual effect that appears to be rotating in the opposite direction. Furthermore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the actual switching timing of the rotational direction of the rotating body. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest for players.

If the motor is actually decelerated suddenly (shortened deceleration period) in order to suddenly reverse the direction of rotation of the rotating body, the load on the rotating body or motor may increase due to the effects of inertia, etc. be. On the other hand, according to the present means, even though the deceleration period is set long, the player can visually perceive it as if there was a sudden reversal, thereby reducing the load on the rotating body, motor, etc. be able to. As a result, the durability of the rotating body, motor, etc. can be improved.

However, during the deceleration period of the motor, the period of movement of the light-transmitting part gradually becomes longer, so that the blinking period of the light-emitting body may have to be variably controlled in accordance with this.

Means B11. Any of the means B1 to B10 is characterized in that the method is configured such that when a winning result is obtained through the lottery process, the proportion of the predetermined conditions being satisfied is higher than when a winning result is not obtained. A gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the above means B11, the same effects as the above means A11 are achieved. In other words, if a strobe effect (wagon wheel effect) that makes it appear that the rotating body (light-transmitting part) is rotating in the opposite direction to the actual rotation direction is performed, the gaming value will be reduced. If the expectation level that can be given is high, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation.

As a result, the player actively participates in the game performance, for example by operating the operating means, and can further increase interest.

Means B12. The game according to any one of means B1 to B11, characterized in that the light emitting body is provided so as to emit surface light corresponding to at least a predetermined section in the rotating direction that is visible to the player of the rotating body. Machine.

According to the above means B12, the same effects as the above means A12 are achieved.

Means B13. The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B12, wherein the light emitting body is fixed in a state separated from the rotating body.

According to the above means B13, the same effects as the above means A13 are achieved.

Means C1. a lottery means for performing a lottery process based on a predetermined opportunity;
A gaming machine comprising a gaming value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined gaming value when a winning result is obtained in the lottery process,
a rotating body rotatably provided;
a motor that rotates the rotating body;
a motor control means for driving and controlling the motor;
a light emitting body capable of emitting a predetermined light;
and a light emission control means capable of controlling the light emitting body,
The rotating body has M (M is an integer of 1 or more) light-transmitting parts capable of transmitting the light emitted from the light-emitting body at equal intervals at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the rotating body (for example, arranged at equal angular intervals of a predetermined angle of 360°/M around the rotation axis,
The light emission control means is configured to control, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a light transmitting part movement period in which the light transmitting part moves by the predetermined interval (a time period during which the rotary body rotates by 360°/M), and a blinking of the light emitter. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute light emitting body blinking control that has the same period.

Now, as stated in the above "Problems to be Solved by the Invention", there is still room for improvement in the performance using rotating bodies.

One problem is that there are mechanical limits to controlling the rotational drive of a rotating body using a motor or the like. As a result, depending on the mode of operation, the motion may appear slow, which may reduce the player's interest.

For example, it is extremely difficult to perform drive control to suddenly stop a rotating body (motor) without providing a deceleration period due to the influence of inertia and the like. In addition, if the rotating body (motor) is suddenly stopped, the load on the rotating body, motor, etc. may become significantly large. As a result, there is a risk that the assembled state of the rotating body and the motor may become loose, resulting in decreased durability.

In this regard, according to the means C1, the M number of transparent parts rotate a rotating body arranged at regular intervals at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction, and when a predetermined condition is met, the light transmission parts The light-emitting body blinking control is configured such that the light-transmitting part movement period in which the light-transmitting part moves by one formation pitch interval (the period in which the light-transmitting part moves by one formation pitch interval) is the same as the blinking cycle of the light-emitting body. There is.

As a result, the light-transmitting part that is visible to the player when the light-emitting body lights up at a predetermined timing will be visible at a position that has advanced by a distance corresponding to one formation pitch interval the next time the light-emitting body lights up. becomes.

With such a configuration, according to the present means, a strobe phenomenon (wagon wheel effect) in which the rotating body (light-transmitting part) appears to be stationary even though the rotating body is actually rotating can be avoided. can be caused. As a result, it is possible to produce, for example, a visual effect that gives the player the illusion that the rotating body has suddenly come to a sudden stop.

As a result, it is possible to improve the interest by using the rotating body effect using the strobe phenomenon (wagon wheel effect).

Means C2. a lottery means for performing a lottery process based on a predetermined opportunity;
A gaming machine comprising a gaming value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined gaming value when a winning result is obtained in the lottery process,
a rotating body rotatably provided;
a motor that rotates the rotating body;
a motor control means for driving and controlling the motor;
a light emitting body capable of emitting a predetermined light;
and a light emission control means capable of controlling the light emitting body,
The rotating body has M (M is an integer of 1 or more) light-transmitting parts that can transmit the light emitted from the light-emitting body at regular intervals at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the rotating body (for example, arranged at equal angular intervals of a predetermined angle of 360°/M around the rotation axis,
A gaming machine characterized in that the light emission control means is configured to be able to perform light emission blinking control that satisfies the following relational expression (γ) when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

T _r = {T _p × (n+1)} ...... (γ)
However, n: an integer greater than or equal to 0, T _r : blinking period of the light emitting body,
T _p : Transparent part movement period in which the transparent part moves by the predetermined interval.

According to the means C2, by executing the light emitting body blinking control in which the blinking period T _r of the light emitting body is made the same as an integral multiple of the light transmitting part moving period T _p , the rotating body (transparent part) can be visually recognized as standing still. As a result, the same effects as the above means C1 are achieved.

Means C3. The gaming machine according to means C1 or C2, wherein the light emitting control means is capable of starting the light emitting body blinking control when a predetermined operation means is operated by a player.

According to the means C3, the performance that produces the above-mentioned visual effect is executed when the player operates the operating means. This strengthens the player's awareness that he or she is actively participating in the game, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, if the above-mentioned light emitting body blinking control is not performed, but the rotational behavior of the rotating body is merely changed mechanically, the rotating body may suddenly stop when the operating means is operated. When attempting to perform an effect that causes the player to move, a time lag occurs between when the player operates the operating means and when the rotating body actually stops, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

In this regard, according to the present means, by performing the light-emitting body blinking control as described above, operational responsiveness can be improved and the above-mentioned problems can be reduced. That is, at the timing when the player operates the operating means, the rotating body can be visually recognized as if it had stopped. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Means C4. The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C3, wherein the light emission control means is configured to be able to execute the light emitting body blinking control in a constant speed rotation state in which the motor rotates at a constant speed. .

According to the above means C4, the same effects as the above means A8 are achieved. In addition, as an effect, it is possible to create a visual effect that gives the player the illusion that a rotating body that is rotating at a constant speed has suddenly come to a sudden stop.

Means C5. The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C4, wherein the light emission control means is configured to be able to execute the light emitter blinking control during an acceleration period of the motor.

According to the means C5, simultaneously with the start of the rotating body and during the acceleration period of the rotating body, a visual effect that gives the player the illusion that the rotating body is apparently stationary as before is produced. can be done. Furthermore, by stopping the light emitting body blinking control when the rotating body actually enters a constant speed rotation state, the player can visually perceive the rotating body as if it were rapidly accelerating.

When the motor is actually suddenly accelerated from a stopped state (when the acceleration period is shortened), there is a risk that the load on the rotating body, the motor, etc. will increase. On the other hand, according to the present means, even though the acceleration period is set long, the player can visually perceive it as if the acceleration was suddenly accelerated in the opposite direction. can be reduced. As a result, the durability of the rotating body, motor, etc. can be improved.

However, during the acceleration period of the motor, the light-transmitting section movement period gradually becomes shorter, so that the light emission control means needs to variably (change) control the blinking period of the light-emitting body in accordance with this.

Means C6. The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C5, wherein the light emission control means is configured to be able to execute the light emitting body blinking control during a deceleration period of the motor.

According to the above means C6, during the deceleration period of the rotating body, the rotating body (transparent portion) can be visually recognized as being apparently stationary.

As a result, even when the rotating body is actually stopped, a visual effect as if the rotating body is at rest can be produced at a stage (deceleration period) prior to the timing at which the rotating body actually stops. Furthermore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the actual timing at which the rotating body stops. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest for players.

When the motor is actually suddenly decelerated (the deceleration period is shortened) in order to suddenly stop the rotating body, the load on the rotating body, motor, etc. may increase due to the influence of inertia and the like. On the other hand, according to the present means, even though the deceleration period is set long, the player can see it as if it had suddenly stopped, thereby reducing the load on the rotating body, motor, etc. be able to. As a result, the durability of the rotating body, motor, etc. can be improved.

However, during the deceleration period of the motor, the light-transmitting section movement period gradually becomes longer, so that the light emission control means needs to variably (change) control the blinking period of the light-emitting body in accordance with this.

Means C7. Any of the means C1 to C6 characterized in that the method is configured such that when a winning result is obtained through the lottery process, a higher percentage of the predetermined conditions are met than when a winning result is not obtained. A gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the above means C7, the same effects as the above means A11 are achieved. In other words, if a strobe effect (wagon wheel effect) that makes the rotating body (light-transmitting part) appear to be stationary is performed, there is a high expectation that it will provide gaming value. It is possible to create a sense of expectation in the player.

As a result, the player actively participates in the game performance, for example by operating the operating means, and can further increase interest.

Means C8. The game according to any one of means C1 to C7, characterized in that the light emitting body is provided so as to emit surface light corresponding to at least a predetermined section in the rotating direction that is visible to the player of the rotating body. Machine.

According to the above means C8, the same effects as the above means A12 are achieved.

Means C9. The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C8, wherein the light emitting body is fixed in a state separated from the rotating body.

According to the above means C9, the same effect as the above means A13 is achieved.

Means D1. a lottery means for performing a lottery process based on a predetermined opportunity;
A gaming machine comprising a gaming value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined gaming value when a winning result is obtained in the lottery process,
a rotating body rotatably provided;
a motor that rotates the rotating body;
a motor control means for driving and controlling the motor;
a light emitting body capable of emitting a predetermined light;
and a light emission control means capable of controlling the light emitting body,
The rotating body has M (M is an integer of 1 or more) light-transmitting parts capable of transmitting the light emitted from the light-emitting body at equal intervals at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the rotating body (for example, arranged at equal angular intervals of a predetermined angle of 360°/M around the rotation axis,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the light emission control means is configured to be able to perform light-emitting body blinking control in which the light-emitting body periodically repeats a lighting state and a non-lighting state when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

Now, as stated in the above "Problems to be Solved by the Invention", there is still room for improvement in the performance using rotating bodies.

One problem is that there are mechanical limits to controlling the rotational drive of a rotating body using a motor or the like. As a result, depending on the mode of operation, the motion may appear slow, which may reduce the player's interest.

In this regard, according to the means D1, the M light-transmitting parts rotate the rotating bodies arranged at regular intervals at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction, and when the predetermined condition is met, the light emitting body is turned on. It is configured to execute light emitting body blinking control that periodically repeats a light-off state.

As a result, according to the present means, it is possible to generate a strobe phenomenon (wagon wheel effect), and it is possible to improve the interest by using the rotating body effect.

In this way, by using the strobe phenomenon (wagon wheel effect), you can change the rotation by simply changing the flashing cycle of the light emitting body without changing the actual operating mode of the rotating body, such as the rotation direction or rotation speed of the rotating body. The apparent behavior of the body can be changed.

In other words, the motor can be driven and controlled using a constant control pattern at all times without preparing a large number of motor control patterns, so it is possible to suppress the complexity of motor control.

Means D2. a lottery means for performing a lottery process based on a predetermined opportunity;
A gaming machine comprising a gaming value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined gaming value when a winning result is obtained in the lottery process,
a rotating body rotatably provided;
a motor that rotates the rotating body;
a motor control means for driving and controlling the motor;
a light emitting body capable of emitting a predetermined light;
and a light emission control means capable of controlling the light emitting body,
The rotating body has M (M is an integer of 1 or more) light-transmitting parts that can transmit the light emitted from the light-emitting body at regular intervals at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the rotating body (for example, arranged at equal angular intervals of a predetermined angle of 360°/M around the rotation axis,
A gaming machine characterized in that the light emission control means is configured to be able to perform light emission blinking control that satisfies the following relational expression (δ) when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

{T _p ×n}< _Tr ≦{T _p ×(n+1)} ・・・・・・(δ)
However, n: an integer greater than or equal to 0, T _r : blinking period of the light emitting body,
T _p : Transparent part movement period in which the transparent part moves by the predetermined interval (time for the rotating body to rotate by 360°/M).

According to the above means D2, the same effects as the above means D1 are achieved.

Means D3. The gaming machine according to means D1 or D2, wherein the light emitting control means is capable of starting the light emitting body blinking control when a predetermined operation means is operated by a player.

According to the means D3, the performance that produces the above-mentioned visual effect is executed when the player operates the operating means. This strengthens the player's awareness that he or she is actively participating in the game, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, if the operating mode of the rotating body is changed when the operating means is operated in a configuration that only mechanically changes the operating mode of the rotating body without performing the above-mentioned light emitting body blinking control, If an attempt is made to perform a change in performance, there will be a time lag between the time the player operates the operating means and the time the player recognizes that the operating mode of the rotating body has changed, making the player feel uncomfortable. There is a risk of it getting lost.

In this regard, according to the present means, by performing the light-emitting body blinking control as described above, operational responsiveness can be improved and the above-mentioned problems can be reduced. In other words, the player can visually recognize that the operating mode of the rotating body has changed at the timing when the player operates the operating means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Means D4. The gaming machine according to any one of means D1 to D3, wherein the light emission control means is configured to be able to change the blinking cycle of the light emitting body.

According to the above means D4, by changing the blinking period of the light emitting body, the apparent operating mode of the rotating body (transparent part) can be changed. As a result, it is possible to diversify rotating body effects using the strobe phenomenon (wagon wheel effect). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Means D5. The gaming machine according to means D4, wherein the light emission control means is capable of changing the blinking cycle of the light emitting body when a predetermined operation means is operated by the player.

According to the above-mentioned means D5, the same effects as the above-mentioned means A5 are achieved.

Means D6. The gaming machine according to means D4 or D5, wherein the light emission control means is capable of changing the blinking cycle of the light emitting body according to the operation mode of a predetermined operation means operated by the player.

According to the above means D6, the same effects as the above means A6 are achieved.

Means D7. The light emission control means is configured such that the difference between at least the blinking cycle of the light emitting body and the light transmitting part movement cycle in which the light transmitting part moves by the predetermined interval (a time period during which the rotating body rotates by 360°/M) is a predetermined cycle. It is possible to execute a first light-emitting body blinking control such that the first light-emitting body blinking control and a second light-emitting body blinking control in which the difference between the blinking period of the light-emitting body and the moving period of the transparent part is larger than the first light-emitting body blinking control. consists of
If a winning result is obtained through the lottery process, the second light emitting body blinking control is executed more often than the first light emitting body blinking control. A gaming machine according to any one of means D4 to D6.

According to the above-mentioned means D7, the same effects as the above-mentioned means A7 are achieved.

Means D8. The gaming machine according to any one of means D1 to D7, wherein the light emission control means is configured to be able to execute the light emitting body blinking control in a constant speed rotation state in which the motor rotates at a constant speed. .

According to the above-mentioned means D8, the same effects as the above-mentioned means A8 are achieved.

Means D9. The gaming machine according to any one of means D1 to D8, wherein the light emission control means is configured to be able to execute the light emitter blinking control during an acceleration period of the motor.

According to the means D9, it is possible to perform a rotating body effect using a strobe phenomenon (wagon wheel effect) simultaneously with the start of the rotating body.

Means D10. The gaming machine according to any one of means D1 to D9, wherein the light emission control means is configured to be able to execute the light emitting body blinking control during a deceleration period of the motor.

According to the means D10, it is possible to perform a rotating body effect using a strobe phenomenon (wagon wheel effect) until just before the rotating body completely stops.

Means D11. Any of the means D1 to D10 is configured such that when a winning result is obtained through the lottery process, the proportion of the predetermined condition being satisfied is higher than when a winning result is not obtained. A gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means D11, when a winning result is obtained through the lottery process, the light emitting body blinking control is performed more often than when a winning result is not obtained. In other words, when an effect that causes a strobe phenomenon (wagon wheel effect) is performed, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation if the expectation level that the game value can be given is high.

As a result, the player actively participates in the game performance, for example by operating the operating means, and can further increase interest.

Means D12. A game according to any one of means D1 to D11, characterized in that the light emitting body is provided so as to emit surface light corresponding to at least a predetermined section in the rotating direction that is visible to the player of the rotating body. Machine.

According to the above means D12, the same effects as the above means D12 are achieved.

Means D13. The gaming machine according to any one of means D1 to D12, wherein the light emitting body is fixed in a state separated from the rotating body.

According to the above means D13, the same effects as the above means D13 are achieved.

Incidentally, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the above means A1 to means A13, a part or all of the structure of any of the above means A1 to A13, and a structure of the above means B1 to B13. Any part or all of any of the above means C1 to C9, or any part or all of any of the above means D1 to D13. Any combination of at least one configuration may be implemented.

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means B1 to B13, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means A1 to A13, and a configuration of a part or all of the means B1 to B13. A part or all of any of the above means C1 to C9, and a part or all of any of the above means D1 to D13. or at least one configuration may be arbitrarily combined and implemented.

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means C1 to C9, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means A1 to A13, and a configuration of a part or all of the means B1 to B13. A part or all of any of the above means C1 to C9, and a part or all of any of the above means D1 to D13. or at least one configuration may be arbitrarily combined and implemented.

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means D1 to D13, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means A1 to A13, and a configuration of a part or all of the means B1 to B13. A part or all of any of the above means C1 to C9, and a part or all of any of the above means D1 to D13. or at least one configuration may be arbitrarily combined and implemented.

Below, the basic configurations of various gaming machines to which the above-mentioned means are applied are shown.

(a) The gaming machine in each of the above means is a pinball gaming machine. As a more detailed example, "a firing operation means (game ball firing handle) operated by the player, a firing means (such as a firing solenoid) that flicks and fires a game ball based on the operation of the firing operation means, and A pinball game machine that includes a game area through which the fired game balls are guided, and ball entry means (general winning hole, variable winning device, starting hole, etc.) arranged within the game area.

(b) The gaming machine or the pinball gaming machine in each of the above means is a pachinko machine or a gaming machine similar to a pachinko machine.

In a pinball game machine such as a pachinko machine, an identification information string (symbol string; specifically, a reel with a pattern, a rotating body such as a belt, etc.) consisting of a plurality of identification information (symbols) is displayed in a variable manner (specifically, The configuration may include a variable display means (specifically, a rotating body unit such as a reel unit) that stops and displays the identification information string after the rotation of the reel or the like.

In such a case, a configuration may be adopted in which the variable display means (rotating body such as a reel) performs light emitting body blinking control related to each of the above means. That is, the variable display means may be configured to perform an effect that causes a strobe phenomenon.

Of course, in a pinball game machine such as a pachinko machine, a rotating accessory may be provided separately from the variable display means, and the light emitting body blinking control related to each of the above means may be performed in the rotating accessory. In other words, this rotating accessory may be configured to produce a strobe effect (wagon wheel effect).

(c) The gaming machine in each of the above means shall be a reel-type gaming machine such as a slot machine. As a more detailed example, "a sequence of identification information (symbol sequence; specifically, a rotating object such as a reel or belt with a pattern) consisting of a plurality of identification information (symbols) is displayed in a variable manner (specifically, a reel The main variable display means (specifically, a rotary body unit such as a reel unit) that stops and displays the identification information string after the rotation of the starting operation means (specifically, the start lever). The identification information (symbol) starts to fluctuate, and the fluctuation of the identification information (symbol) is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (specifically, the stop button), and when it stops, the identification information (symbol) is aligned on the effective line. An example of this is a reel-type gaming machine configured such that a gaming value is awarded on the condition that the identification information is specific identification information.

In a reel-type gaming machine such as a slot machine, the main variable display means (a rotating body such as a reel) may be configured to perform blinking control of the light emitting body related to each of the above means. In other words, the main variable display means may be configured to perform an effect that causes a strobe phenomenon.

In addition to the above-mentioned main variable display means, in a reel-type gaming machine such as a slot machine, an identification information string (rotating body such as a reel with a pattern) consisting of a plurality of identification information (symbols) is displayed variably ( It may also be configured to include a sub-variable display means (rotating body unit such as a reel unit) that stops and displays the identification information string after rotation of the reel or the like.

In such a case, the sub-variable display means (rotating body such as a reel) may be configured to control the flashing of the light emitters related to each of the above means. In other words, the sub-variable display means may be configured to produce a strobe effect.

Of course, in a reel-type gaming machine such as a slot machine, a rotary accessory is provided separately from the main variable display means and the sub-variable display means, and the light-emitting body blinking control related to each of the above means is performed in the rotary accessory. It is also possible to have a configuration in which this is done. In other words, this rotating accessory may be configured to produce a strobe effect (wagon wheel effect).

(d) The gaming machines used in each of the above means must be ball-based gaming machines. Examples of ball-based gaming machines include "gaming machines that are a combination of a slot machine and a pachinko machine (particularly a ball-based gaming machine that uses slot machines as a game medium)".

As a more detailed example, "a sequence of identification information (symbol sequence; specifically, a rotating object such as a reel or belt with a pattern) consisting of a plurality of identification information (symbols) is displayed in a variable manner (specifically, a reel The main variable display means (specifically, a rotary body unit such as a reel unit) that stops and displays the identification information string after the rotation of the starting operation means (specifically, the start lever). The identification information (symbol) starts to fluctuate, and the fluctuation of the identification information (symbol) is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (specifically, the stop button), and when it stops, the identification information (symbol) is aligned on the effective line. A taking-in means is configured such that a gaming value is given on the condition that the identification information is specific identification information, and further includes a ball receiving tray (upper tray, etc.) for taking in game balls from the ball receiving tray, and said ball receiving tray. and a payout means for paying out game balls, the game machine being configured such that a game start condition is satisfied when the game balls are taken in by the taking means.

In a ball-based gaming machine with slot machine specifications, the main variable display means (a rotating body such as a reel) may be configured to control the blinking of the light emitting body related to each of the above means. In other words, the main variable display means may be configured to perform an effect that causes a strobe phenomenon.

Furthermore, in a ball-based gaming machine with slot machine specifications, in addition to the above-mentioned main variable display means, an identification information string (rotating body such as a reel with a pattern attached) consisting of a plurality of identification information (symbols) can be displayed variably ( It may also be configured to include a sub-variable display means (rotating body unit such as a reel unit) that stops and displays the identification information string after rotation of the reel or the like.

In such a case, the sub-variable display means (rotating body such as a reel) may be configured to control the flashing of the light emitters related to each of the above means. In other words, the sub-variable display means may be configured to produce a strobe effect.

Of course, in a ball-based gaming machine with slot machine specifications, a rotating body accessory is provided separately from the main variable display means and the sub-variable display means, and the light-emitting body blinking control related to each of the above means is performed in the rotating body accessory. It is also possible to have a configuration in which this is done. In other words, this rotating accessory may be configured to produce a strobe effect (wagon wheel effect).

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine, 35... Variable display device unit, 42... Decorative pattern display device, 42a... Liquid crystal display part, 125... Production button, 262... Sub-control device, 552... ROM, 553... RAM, 761... Production accessory unit , 812...Circular lens part, 813...LED board, 813c...LED, 817...Rotating body drive motor, 820...Rotating body, 820b...Circular decoration part, 831a...First transparent part, 831b...Second transparent part , 831c...Third transparent part, 831d...Fourth transparent part, 831e...Fifth transparent part, 832...Boundary transparent part, 850...Light emitter, C8...Accessory production counter, E...Decoration area, JF ...Production status flag, BF...Button operation flag, PF...Accessory production pattern flag, _Tc ...Rotation period of the rotating body, _Tr ...Flashing period of the light emitting body, _Tp ...Area movement period.

Claims (1)

a first operating means and a second operating means that can be operated by the player;
a lottery means that performs a lottery process based on a predetermined opportunity based on the operation of the first operation means ;
A gaming machine comprising a gaming value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined gaming value when a winning result is obtained in the lottery process,
a rotating body rotatably provided;
a motor that rotates the rotating body;
a motor control means for driving and controlling the motor;
a light emitting body capable of emitting a predetermined light;
A light emission control means capable of controlling the light emitter,
On the rotating body, M decorative parts (M is an integer of 1 or more) that can transmit the light emitted from the light emitting body are arranged at regular intervals at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the rotating body. ,
The motor control means is configured to be able to execute predetermined motor control accompanied by a speed change of the rotating body based on the operation of the second operation means,
The light emission control means is configured to be able to change a period in which the light emitting body is in a lighting state or a period in which it is in a non-lighting state, and the predetermined condition is set based on the result of the lottery process executed based on the operation of the first operation means. If established, when the predetermined motor control is executed based on the operation of the second operating means , it is possible to execute a predetermined light-emitting body blinking control in which the light-emitting body switches between a lighting state and a non-lighting state, and the game is played. configured to be able to change the predetermined light emitting body blinking control according to the operation mode of the second operation means operated by the person ,
The lottery process is configured such that when a predetermined winning result is obtained, a higher percentage of the predetermined conditions are met than when a corresponding winning result is not obtained;
Or
The predetermined condition is configured to be satisfied when a predetermined winning result is obtained through the lottery process;
A gaming machine characterized by being at least one of the following.

Images